JP2019180572A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can prevent an illuminated movable accessor from becoming remarkably dark when the accessory performs a moving operation, and thus can enhance visual performance effects.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a plurality of LEDs 2130b; a plurality of convex portions 2112a of a lens part 2112; a front-frame decoration member; and a rotation unit for moving the plurality of convex portions 2112a. The plurality of convex portions 2112a are disposed along the rotation direction, for example, at an interval of 60 degrees. The plurality of convex portions 2112a are formed transmittable of light projected from the plurality of LEDs 2130b and can transmit, at an initial position, light projected from the plurality of LEDs 2130b. The plurality of LEDs 2130b are disposed at positions where projected light can be transmitted to the plurality of convex portions 2112a and are disposed along the rotation position of the convexed portions at an interval 30 degrees, half the above mentioned interval, even when the convex portions 2112a are moved to a back side of the front-frame decoration member and to positions rotated approximately 90 degrees from the initial position.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 135

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as a game ball having passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a rotating accessory as a production device, and changes the amount of transmitted light as the rotating accessory rotates (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-115287 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the rotating accessory rotates, it is not possible to emit light with uniform brightness, and there is a possibility that the visual effect is reduced due to so-called uneven light emission.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and prevents a moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing a visual effect. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light (for example, LED 2130b of LED substrate 2130);
A plurality of translucent portions (for example, convex portions 2112a of the lens portion 2112 of the rotating member 2110) capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means;
A decorative portion (for example, a front frame decorative member 2170) disposed on the front side of the plurality of translucent portions;
Moving means (for example, a rotating unit 2180) for moving the plurality of light transmitting parts,
The plurality of translucent portions are arranged at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 60 degrees) along the moving direction (for example, the rotating direction of the rotating member 2110),
The plurality of translucent parts are:
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is formed so as to be transmissive,
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means can be transmitted at a predetermined position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 134),
The plurality of light emitting means includes
Even when the plurality of translucent parts move on the back side of the decoration part and move to a specific position other than the predetermined position (for example, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees shown in FIG. 135 from the initial position shown in FIG. 134). , Is arranged at a position where the irradiated light can be transmitted with respect to the translucent part,
It is characterized by being arranged at intervals (for example, intervals of 30 degrees) narrower than the predetermined interval along the moving direction of the plurality of light transmitting portions.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of translucent portions are movable on the back side of the decorative portion and are arranged at predetermined intervals along the moving direction, and the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at intervals more than the predetermined intervals. Has been. As a result, even when the plurality of translucent parts move, light from the same number of light emitting means as the predetermined position is irradiated, and the plurality of translucent parts are more than in the predetermined position during movement. The amount of light is not significantly reduced, and an effect in which a plurality of translucent portions and a decorative portion are integrated can be performed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when the moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a moving accessory irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during the round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating operation | movement of the big prize opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing relevant to the big prize opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the game board of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the mode background (sub state) of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the example of a display of a character hold image. It is a figure which shows the kind of holding | maintenance character of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows another example of a display which the holding | maintenance character of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention appeared. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of a display where the reservation character appeared. (A) It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the pre-reach effect (battle effect) of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the example of a display of the state in which reach was established after the pre-reach effect. (A) It is a figure which shows another example of a display of the state in which reach was established after the pre-reach effect of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of a display of the state in which reach was established after the pre-reach effect. (A) It is a figure which shows another example of a display of the state in which reach was achieved after the pre-reach effect (battle effect) of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of a display of the state in which reach was established after the pre-reach effect. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fall random number determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table for 1st starting openings of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) It is a figure which similarly shows the symbol determination table for 2nd starting openings. It is a figure which shows the jackpot kind determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the sub variation pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the reservation character determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the status determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the level determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the example of the effect. It is a figure which shows the level determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the example of the effect. It is a figure which shows the level determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the example of the effect. (A) It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the level-up effect of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the example of a display of a level-up effect. It is a figure which shows the middle boss battle preemptive effect determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the technique selection list | wrist in the arrangement | positioning lottery table of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the arrangement | positioning type in the arrangement | positioning lottery table of the big boss battle effect in normal time. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | positioning lottery table of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the support determination table of the boss battle effect in the time of the probability change of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the support determination table of the boss battle effect in the time of the probability change of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the boss kind prescription | regulation table at the time of probability change at the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the rank improvement effect of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the rank improvement effect of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol check memory | storage process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start winning command reception of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding character determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the status determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the level determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the middle boss battle preemptive effect determination process of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big boss battle production | presentation determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific display example (1st display example) of the level-up effect in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention when the growth type of a holding | maintenance character is a balance type. It is a figure which shows the specific display example (1st display example) of the level-up effect in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention when the growth type of a holding | maintenance character is a balance type. It is a figure which shows the specific display example (2nd display example) of the level-up effect in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention when the growth type of a holding | maintenance character is a balance type. It is a figure which shows an example of the level-up timing according to the growth type of a holding | maintenance character in the case where the level-up effect of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the level-up timing according to the growth type of a holding | maintenance character in the case where the level-up effect of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the level-up timing according to the growth type of a holding | maintenance character in the case where the level-up effect of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of level-up in the case where the exclusive effect of a reservation character is performed when the level-up effect of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the big boss battle effect at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the support effect performed by the boss battle effect in the time of probability change of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the support effect performed by the boss battle effect in the time of probability change of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the level takeover character determination table of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement | positioning process at the time of the start winning command reception of the gaming machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation character determination process of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the level taking over effect of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the level taking over effect of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the level taking over effect of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the continue effect of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the continue effect of the game machine which concerns on another example of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the game board and its peripheral member of the game machine which concern on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the back side of the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the character block of the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the character block of the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the LED board of the logo unit in the game board of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the accessory unit of the standby state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the accessory unit of the standby state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the accessory unit of the waiting state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the accessory unit of the appearance state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the accessory unit of the appearance state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the accessory unit of the appearance state of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a principal part perspective view which shows the principal part of the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a principal part notch rear view which shows the principal part of the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the level display part in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the rotating member in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the diffused lens contained in the rotation member in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view which shows the level display part in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the level display part in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the LED board of the level display part in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the LED board of the level display part in the accessory unit of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base in which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (a player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3) A rear frame base plate (not shown) provided detachably, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 that is provided below the upper tray 17 and can store, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the upper ball 17 stays in the vicinity of the payout port 20. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the push-down operation button 9A is protruded from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side from the surface (front surface), for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and a support ball. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the camera, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the firing stop switch, and a handle disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d. And a cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The played game ball is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). For example, in this embodiment, 90.9 game balls can be launched per minute by the launch drive device, and one game ball can be launched approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

  In addition, as a method of increasing / decreasing the launch intensity of the game ball in the launch device 26, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as other launch devices, it is linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. It may be provided with a launching spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for winding (clamping) the launching spring. In such a launching device, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launching handle to increase or decrease the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. The firing strength of can be increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can flow and roll. is doing. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, and the second start port 33. The blade member 34, the passing gate 35, the big prize opening 37, the big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the big prize opening 37, the plurality of general prize winning openings 40, the out opening 41, the upper movable production member 42A, and the lower movable production member 42B. , A cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40 form a passing region through which a game ball can pass. . The big prize opening shutter 37A is a displacement member that can be displaced into a first mode in which a game ball can easily pass through a passing area (a big prize opening 37) and a second mode in which it is difficult to close. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as components or parts constituting the variable winning device.

  The first guide rail 30 is disposed so as to extend from the left side toward the upper center of the game board 1 toward the game board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The second guide rail 30 ′ is arranged so as to extend from the upper right side toward the lower right side toward the game board 1, and includes an outer rail 30 </ b> C and an inner rail 30 </ b> D. The outer rail 30 </ b> C and the inner rail 30 </ b> D are for guiding the game ball from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the big winning opening 37 arranged at the lower right side. A plurality of convex portions 30E that can come into contact with the game balls flowing down between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals on the surfaces where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D face each other. Yes. As a result, the game ball flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'is prevented from advancing by repeatedly coming into contact with the convex portion 30E before being released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', resulting in a grand prize. The traveling speed of the game ball is effectively decelerated before reaching the mouth 37. The lower end of the second guide rail 30 'is located near the upper right side of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). As a result, the game ball released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 ′ abuts on an upper surface 43 a of a cover member 43 to be described later, and then rolls along the upper surface 43 a toward the big prize opening 37. And move on. FIG. 3 shows a form in which the convex portions 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex portions 30E of the inner rail 30D are arranged at equal intervals along the direction in which the game balls are guided while facing each other. These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions shifted from each other along the direction in which the game balls are guided.

  The stage 31 distributes the game ball flow area in the game area 1 p and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning at any one of the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the big winning port 37, and the general winning port 40, and if the game ball is not won or passed When the player passes through the gate 35 and does not win a prize after that, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or enters the passing area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through or enters the passage area, a situation that is advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) is given. Means. At this time, passing through the passing area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the passing area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Accordingly, both the passing of the game ball to the passing area and the entering of the game lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, it is unified as “winning” unless otherwise specified.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launch force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′. . In general, the method of hitting the game ball down to the left side of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down along the right side of the stage 31 or along the second guide rail 30 ′ is “ It is called “right-handed”.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide a lottery opportunity on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives the opportunity to do.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the first start port 32. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to have a forward tilting / retreating posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 33, This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The big prize opening 37 is opened in a winning game state (such as a big hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The big winning opening 37 is provided at the lower right side of the game area 1p and substantially at the right side of the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. In addition, the position where the special winning opening 37 is arranged is not limited to the position described above, and can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The big winning opening 37 includes an opening having a relatively large size in the left-right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an open opening between the front face of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state. It becomes.

  The special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The size in the short direction of the big prize opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the game ball. The special prize opening shutter 37A is provided so as to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. In the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, the state protruding forward of the game board 1 becomes a closed state in which the special winning opening 37 is closed, and the state retracted to the rear of the gaming board 1 becomes an open state in which the special winning opening 37 is opened. . The upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is an inclined surface with a relatively gentle downward-sloping tendency in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is disposed so as to face the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43 a that is connected to the closed large winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A, a front end guide portion 43 b, and an opening 43 c corresponding to the large winning opening 37. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'to the right end of the big prize opening 37 (opening 43c), and is relatively gently lowered to the left. Make a trend slope. The upper surface 43a is disposed so as to lead to the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end while supporting the plurality of game balls emitted from the second guide rail 30 '. The front end guide portion 43b forms an upright wall and is formed to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the special winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can come into contact with the game ball are provided at predetermined intervals. In addition, a plurality of convex portions 1d that can come into contact with the game ball are also provided at predetermined intervals on an appropriate front portion of the game board 1 that faces the front end guide portion 43b. The convex portion 1d of the game board 1 and the convex portion 43d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered manner at positions shifted from each other along the traveling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that rolls along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly abuts on the convex portions 1d and 43d alternately while moving to the left end of the big prize opening 37 (large prize opening shutter 37A). The progress of the game ball is effectively decelerated before passing through the special winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which a game ball can flow when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in a closed state, and suppress the progression of the flowing game ball. The suppression part 430 is formed. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43 c is disposed at a position corresponding to the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A and forms the big prize opening 37. A ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a big prize opening count switch 370 are provided at the location of the game board 1 located inside the cover member 43. The game ball that has dropped from the open big winning opening 37 is led to the big winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a win by the big winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation related to the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

  One or more general winning ports 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40, a lottery is not performed, but a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 to be described later, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that becomes higher than the non-temporary gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probabilistic non-temporary gaming state, and the special symbol in the normal gaming state When the lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time-short game state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, it will surely shift to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the normal gaming state that is the probability-changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state), and the non-probable / non-time-short gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state). Therefore, the game is not shifted to the normal game state which is a non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, the normal game that is in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state when the symbol variation number of the special symbol game (the number of games) reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the probability variation / short time gaming state Transition to the state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, 10 special symbol lotteries (10 special symbol variation display or stop display) were performed in the probability variation / short time gaming state. In addition, the game shifts to a non-probability / non-short-time gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. Is arranged. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotating operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

  The LED unit 5 informs the player of each gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2 has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the normal transition to the big hit gaming state is confirmed. It is lit (or flashes) when a special symbol changes in the gaming state, or when an additional character to be described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit gaming state.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, and is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol.

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and there is a nominal jackpot symbol such as “probability variation 1” that indicates that the transition to the probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. (See FIG. 7). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and the designations such as “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” that indicate the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. And a small hit symbol of a name such as “small hit” that triggers the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 7). That is, the winning symbol of the first special symbol does not have a small hitting symbol that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the winning symbol of the second special symbol hits the small hit that triggers the transition to the small hit gaming state There is a design. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed. Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 6) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as the start memory, and the information of the second special symbol game for the four times held is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Remembered. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 The winning suspension to the first starting port 32 and the winning suspension to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games (round games) to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. To do. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16R” is described, and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round” or “16Rth” is written. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning port left switch 400A and a general winning port right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning port 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a big prize port count switch 370 disposed below the big prize port 37. The big prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 37. When a winning of the game ball is detected by the big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or the lower plate. Dispensing to the plate 18. The big prize opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the game ball passes through the big prize opening 37.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a special prize opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving a special prize opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the special prize opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which a winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. When the special winning opening 37 is opened by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, and the big winning game state is set. Performed when migrated.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in a gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state (“non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state” in this embodiment) is 0/257, and the blade member 34 Will never be released. On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state (time-short game state) is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is released for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. . Note that the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 may be variably displayed in the order of winning in accordance with the winning order.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Accordingly, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of on-hold displays by the LED lamps 551 to 554 and the LED lamps 561 to 564 of the on-hold display unit 56 is also four.

  In the open state of the big prize opening 37 by the big prize opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the big prize opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (in the present embodiment, one winning number) or in advance. It is maintained until one of the conditions such as a specified later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the big prize opening shutter 37A is driven so as to close the big prize opening 37.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times based on a big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as a “round game (round game)”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. Regarding the state from when the grand prize opening 37 is closed by one round game until the grand prize opening 37 is opened as the next round game, “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval” or Also simply called “interval”. In the present embodiment, the big prize opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in other examples, the big prize opening 37 is opened several times in one round. And there may be a closed state. In addition, when a plurality of big prize openings are provided, it is possible to exclusively control the open / closed states of the plurality of big prize openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one large winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the remaining large winning openings are continuously closed.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from that of the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, it is prescribed that the big winning opening 37 is opened only once. . Of course, in the small hit gaming state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before the transition to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In the case of a single round game, when the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the specified number of winnings per round is reached before the open state is opened. Will close the round winning game without closing the big winning opening for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effect decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 has a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a big winning port count switch 370, a general winning port left switch 400A, and a general winning port. A right switch 400B and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per winning prize to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the big prize opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power, and the game ball is controlled to be launched toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, a sound signal, and the like. An amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the signal is included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC is used to select one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (oscillates) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. Etc.) may be controlled.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), the high probability In time (probability game state), it is 1 / 1.05 (5020/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol in the small hit gaming state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to a maximum of 10 times as the number of games (the number of variations of special symbols) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is the winning pattern 1, and the round game round number is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the big winning slot is 7R), the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the big hit gaming state is “normal bonus”, and the bonus content is “7R bonus”. This “normal bonus” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 0 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. Thereby, in the “normal bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 105. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, “bonus” means a notification effect related to the number of prize balls.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability change 1”, the winning pattern is 2, and the round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “large extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “large extra bonus” Bonus ”. With regard to the “large bonus”, with regard to winning at the big winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R is one and the estimated number of winnings from 8R to 16R is four. As a result, in the “large bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 645. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 3, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “middle bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 1 ”. The “medium bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and 3 from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 1”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 2” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 4 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “medium bonus bonus 2”, and the bonus content is “medium” The bonus is 2 ”. “Nakagami Bonus 2” is an estimated number of winnings for the 1R to 7R, 2 for the 8R and 9R, and 10 for the 10R and 11R. The number of winnings is 3, the estimated number of winnings in the 12th R is 1, and the estimated number of winnings in the 13th to 16Rs is 4. As a result, the number of planned award balls is 510 for “middle bonus 2”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 3” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 4”, the winning pattern is 5, round number 16R (the actual round number is also 16R) is given, the bonus name is “small extra bonus 1”, and the bonus content is “small” The bonus is 1 ”. “Small top bonus 1” has an estimated number of winnings from 1R to 7R and two estimated winning numbers from 8R to 16R for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in the “small extra bonus 1”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (entrance rate) of “probability variation 4” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 5”, the winning pattern is 6 and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “small extra bonus 2”, and the production content is “small” The bonus is 2 ”. In the “small bonus 2”, the estimated number of winnings from the 1R to 13R is 1 and the estimated number of winnings from the 14R to 16R is 4 for winning at the big winning opening 37. As a result, in “small extra bonus 2”, the planned number of winning balls is 375. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 5” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 6”, the winning pattern is 7, and the round number is 16R (the actual round number is also 16R), the bonus name is “no extra bonus”, and the bonus content is “no extra” Bonus ”. In the “no extra bonus”, the estimated number of winnings from 1R to 16R for the winning in the big winning opening 37 is one. As a result, in the “no extra bonus”, the planned number of winning balls is 240. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability 6” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 8, and the bonus name and bonus content are “small bonus”. The rush rate of the small hit symbol is set to 100/100. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state does not have the concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The number of winning prizes corresponds to a specified number of winnings that triggers when the winning prize opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state in one round. In this embodiment, the number of winning points (specified number of winnings) Is set to “1”. That is, when one winning prize to the big winning opening 37 is counted in one round, the big winning opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It should be noted that the number of winning prize counts (specified number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. In other words, even when a winning exceeding the number of large winning mouth counts is detected in one round, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning number is paid out. As a result, over-winning that exceeds the number of large winning mouth counts is possible. This point will be described later.

  The short-time performance (specification of the short-time gaming state) is set so that the short-time gaming state continues for a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state). The number of winning balls will be 3 per winning prize at the starting opening (first starting opening 32 and second starting opening 33), 10 per winning prize at the general winning opening 40, It is set to be 15 per winning prize. The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one. The winning count when the second start port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit.

  The specifications may include the following contents. For example, for special symbols, the jackpot probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. In other words, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win the jackpot when the probability is high than when the probability is low. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the winning probability in the other special symbol is higher than that in one special symbol. The special symbol digestion order may be a winning order without setting the priority order for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be a specification for preferential digestion of the first special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Further, the probability variation gaming state may continue until the next big hit win. The number of rounds is not limited to the above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, you may increase the kind of jackpot symbol of a 1st special symbol. Further, an extra bonus may be executed even in the big hit gaming state based on the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) is set to “1”, but is not limited thereto. For example, the number of winning prizes may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a large winning opening shutter or the like that allows more game balls than the large winning opening count to pass simultaneously. The short time performance may be greater than the ST count (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST count including, for example, 0. The number of prize balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls related to the big winning opening is set to a value different from the above, the estimated number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated winning number, and the number of extra balls to be described later is notified. Can be. For normal symbols, the hit probability at the low probability and the high probability is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low, and may be won when the probability is low, for example. The number of symbols per normal symbol is not limited to the above, and may be two or more, for example. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the opening patterns of the blade members are associated with each other differently. The number of winning counts at the second start port may be a value other than those described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) for the special winning opening 37. The open / close patterns A to C are open / close patterns corresponding to the big hit game state, and the open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern corresponding to the small hit game state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types, specific times for defining the open / close patterns, and the like may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section in which the open state is 10 s is a long open in which the open state of the special winning opening 37 is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 10 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 seconds. The opening / closing pattern B is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section in which the open state is 5 s, the middle winning opening is shorter than the long opening in the open state of the special winning opening 37. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only 0.1 s. The section in which the open state is 0.1 s is a short opening that is considerably shorter than the middle opening. That is, the open / close pattern C is a pattern in which the short circuit is opened only once, and the open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.1 s.

  The substantial round game in the big hit game state is a round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing patterns A and B including the long opening or middle opening in which the game ball can be won among the opening / closing patterns A to C described above. Applicable. The round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

  Note that the following contents may be used as the open / close pattern of one round. The open patterns are not limited to the above three types, and may be two types or less or four types or more. For the opening / closing pattern A, the opening time is not 10 s but may be, for example, less than 10 s or more than 10 s, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. For the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time is not 5 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 5 seconds or more than 5 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round. Furthermore, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may have the same opening time, or the opening / closing pattern B may have a longer opening time than the opening / closing pattern A. For the opening / closing pattern C, the opening time is not 0.1 s, but may be, for example, less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Moreover, you may make it open | release in multiple times instead of opening only once in 1 round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the special winning opening and closing patterns (winning patterns). The winning pattern 1 occurs in the case of a normal bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the open round (hereinafter referred to as “specified number of rounds”) and the long opening or middle that enables winning to the big winning opening 37. The actual number of rounds defined only for rounds including at least the opening is a hit pattern defined as 7R. The interval between rounds starts immediately after a specified number of game balls (1) are detected by the grand prize counter switch 370 in one round, and is a big prize until the first open state in the next round. This corresponds to a section in which the mouth 37 is closed. The interval between rounds may be started immediately after the special winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, the interval pattern between rounds includes an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 0.3 s, an interval pattern b in which 1.65 s is set, and an interval pattern in which 2.31 s is set. c, an interval pattern d of 2.97 s is defined. In the winning pattern 1, all the intervals between rounds are interval pattern a, and the winning a prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 7R rounds, and the winning prize opening 37 is in the 8R to 16R rounds. It is defined to be an open / close pattern C. That is, the hit pattern 1 stipulates that the substantial rounds are 7 rounds from 1R to 7R, and the remaining 9 rounds from 8R to 16R are executed as non-essential rounds.

  The winning pattern 2 is a winning pattern that is generated when the extra bonus is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the extra bonus that is executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 2, the number of winning balls based only on the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings: 1) is 240. However, if over winning is included, the expected number of winning balls is Therefore, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is reported as an additional number in the first half round (rounds 1R to 7R).

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the medium addition bonus 1 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern c, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the medium addition bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 3, the number of award balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 240, but if the over winning is included, the scheduled number of winning balls is 510. The number to be performed (270) is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that is generated when the medium addition bonus 2 is set and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 9R is the interval pattern b, and from the end of the 9R to the start of the 11R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between the 11th and 12th rounds is interval pattern a, the interval between rounds from the end of the 12th R to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16th Rs It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the middle addition bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (510) is the second half round (rounds after the 8th round). It is reported as an additional number.

  The winning pattern 5 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 1 is added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 5, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 1R to the start of the 7R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern b, and the 1R to 16R It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 5, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 240, but when including over prizes, the planned number of prize balls is 375. The number (135) to be reported is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The winning pattern 6 is a winning pattern that is generated when the bonus 2 is added and is specified with the specified round number and the actual round number being 16R. In the hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 13Rth is the interval pattern a, the interval between the rounds from the end of the 13Rth to the start of the 16th R is the interval pattern d, and the 1st to 16Rths It is defined that the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all rounds. In the small extra bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 6, the number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the planned number of winning balls (375) is reported as an additional number until the second half round. .

  The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern that occurs when the bonus is not added, and the specified round number and the actual round number are specified as 16R. The winning pattern 7 is defined so that the interval between all rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 16thR is the interval pattern a, and the big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in all the rounds of the 1R to 16R. Has been. In the extra bonus executed as an effect together with the winning pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the expected number of winning balls (240) because over-winning is unlikely to occur, and the number of added balls is notified. Absent.

  The winning pattern 8 occurs in the small winning gaming state, and is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, the winning pattern 8 is executed as a winning pattern in which the possibility of winning a game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the interval time between rounds is defined as the above-described interval patterns a to d on the assumption that the game ball is continuously fired. The interval time between rounds may be defined with reference to the starting point of the launch operation. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls are continuously fired due to the start of the launch operation, for example, the second game ball can reach the winning prize opening shutter 37A from the start of the launch operation. The assumed maximum arrival time of the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the third assumed maximum arrival time is 4.65 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), the fourth assumed maximum arrival time is 5.31 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), 5 The assumed maximum arrival time of the individual is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). Thereby, as interval pattern b, you may prescribe | regulate the time corresponding to such 2nd assumption maximum arrival time. That is, the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-described times, but the interval pattern a is preferably a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum. Preferably, the interval pattern c is less than the fourth assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth assumed maximum arrival time. It is preferable to become. In this embodiment, the interval pattern d, which is the maximum time of the interval between rounds, is defined as a time in which 4 winnings per round (3 winnings over) can be realized, but 5 or more per round It may be a time for winning a prize. However, in the case where five or more winnings are possible, it is preferable that the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is a length that allows at least five game balls to pass simultaneously. In addition, the hit pattern 1 may be assigned with the same opening / closing pattern for all of the rounds, or may be different only in some rounds. Further, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only in some intervals between rounds. The hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different opening / closing patterns in some or all rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only in some intervals between rounds.

[Specifications of the big prize opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as different from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the figure). For example, when the diameter d of the game ball is 11 mm, the long dimension L is about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, a maximum of eight game balls can be simultaneously passed through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, when one game ball is launched in response to the start of the launch operation, the firing interval from when one next game ball is launched or one game ball is launched. 10B, considering the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A (the upper region of the right end portion of the closed big winning opening shutter 37A). In addition, a maximum of four game balls can be passed at the same time. Note that the time until the game ball that has reached the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is detected by the big prize opening count switch 370 (the time until the interval between rounds starts) is about 0.1 s. The time required for the special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A to move from one position to the other position of the closed position and the open position is about 0.01 s. It is.

  That is, in this embodiment, the launching device 26 has a firing rate of 90.90 per minute and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. Further, the game ball passes through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30 ′ from a launch preparation position (not shown) to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37 </ b> A as approximately 3.00-3. It takes 33 seconds. As a result, in a state in which the player continues to make a right strike, after the first game ball reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball wins a big prize approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds later. It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. In addition, the prize winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight gaming balls with a diameter d = 11 mm can be passed in a row at the same time. Since it has an inclined surface that advances by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, a maximum of four game balls can substantially pass at the same time. The inter-round interval is started from the time when a winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and is started immediately before the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37. Also, regarding the time from when the game winning ball shutter 37A is opened immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the game winning port shutter 37A until the game ball winning is detected by the game winning port count switch 370. 0.1 seconds is required. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening / closing operation in which the special prize opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, by assuming the various times as described above, in the state where the right hit is continuously performed in the big hit gaming state, the interval time between the rounds after the end of the 1R round is an interval. If the pattern d is 2.97 s, four winnings including three over winnings per round are possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next game ball will take the big prize opening after 0.99 seconds at the maximum. From reaching the right end portion of the shutter 37A, the time that four game balls including this game ball will be positioned on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99 s + 0.66 s × 3 (pieces). = 2.97 s. In addition, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 2.31s of the interval pattern c, three winnings including two over winnings per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state where the number of over-wins is reduced from two over-wins. Thereby, with respect to the time of the interval pattern c, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-mentioned three over winnings with respect to the time when three game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. This is considered to be obtained by subtracting one passage time from 2.97 s-0.66 s = 2.31 s. Similarly, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two winnings including one over winning per round are possible. This can be assumed as a state in which two over winnings are reduced to one over winning. Thereby, for the time of the interval pattern b, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the two over winnings described above for the time when two game balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It is considered that the passing time for one piece is subtracted from 2.31s−0.66s = 1.65s. Furthermore, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first round is 0.3 s of the interval pattern a, there is no over winning per round and only one winning is possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the game ball that is detected for winning in the first round reaches the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball will be the big prize opening after 0.33 seconds at the shortest. In order to reach the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is proved that the next game ball is opened before reaching the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A in 0.3s shorter than 0.33 seconds. The

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random numbers) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”. 11 and 13 show the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate.

[Additional pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an additional pattern selection table. This additional pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern selection table is a table for selecting an extra pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 7 and defines various additional patterns that are items to be determined and the selection rate (%) when selecting the additional pattern by lottery.

  According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with the hit pattern 2, the extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the extra bonus. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the middle add-on patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the middle add-on patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small extra patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 1. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small extra patterns 5 to 8 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as the extra pattern corresponding to the small extra bonus 2. According to the extra pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with the hit pattern 7, the no-addition pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selection rate (100% in this embodiment) as the extra pattern corresponding to the no extra bonus. Is done.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for allocating an additional pattern that is a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. Each of the additional pattern selection tables other than the additional pattern selection table (success pattern 7) defines four additional patterns. However, the additional pattern selection table may define three or less additional patterns, or each additional pattern selection table. The number of patterns defined for each may be different. Also in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7), a plurality of additional patterns may be defined.

[Additional pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an addition pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table that is referred to in the effect processing during the round (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra pattern table is a table for defining the extra number for the effect and the round for performing the notification according to the extra pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines an additional pattern and round number as reference items and an additional number as a decision item. In addition, the number of additions is notified together with the appearance of an additional character described later.

  According to the extra pattern table (large extra bonus) corresponding to the extra extra bonus, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each extra extra pattern 1 to 4 as an extra pattern. For example, in the large addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R, and “270” is notified as the addition number to the 7R. The total number added up is “405”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 1) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 1, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 1 to 4 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number in the 2R, “105” is notified as the addition number in the 4R, and “135” is notified as the addition number in the 7R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the extra pattern table (medium extra bonus 2) corresponding to the middle extra bonus 2, the number of rounds and the reported extra number are defined for each of the intermediate extra patterns 5 to 8 as the extra pattern. For example, in the middle addition pattern 5, “135” is notified as the addition number at 8R, and “135” is notified as the addition number at 9R. The total number added is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 1) corresponding to the small additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 1, “30” is notified as the addition number to the 2R, and “105” is notified as the addition number to the 4R. The total number of these added is “135”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 2) corresponding to the small additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the notified additional number are defined for each of the small additional patterns 5 to 8 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small addition pattern 5, “135” is reported as the addition number only to the 8th R.

  According to the extra pattern table (no extra bonus) corresponding to the no extra bonus, the number of rounds corresponding to the no extra pattern 1 as the extra pattern and the reported extra number are defined. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

  Note that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, but the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the expected number of prize balls is appropriately distributed. You can do it. In addition, after a numerical value exceeding the total added number is notified as an additional number, a numerical value to be notified may be set so as to be subtracted, so that the predetermined total additional number may be finally obtained. . In addition, for example, “210” may be defined as an initial value, and an additional number may be notified in any round.

[Additional character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The added character lottery table is a table that is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The extra character lottery table is a table for selecting, by lottery, an extra character that appears at the start of the extra bonus or informing the extra number according to the extra pattern. The added character lottery table defines various added patterns as reference items, added characters as determined items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an added character by lottery. As an additional character, “animal”, “female”, and “fireworker” are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “female” addition character is generally higher than that of the “animal” addition character, and the selection rate of the “fireworker” addition character is higher than that of the “female” addition character. Is specified to be high. In the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 8, the selection rate of the additional characters “female” and “fireworks” is generally higher than the additional characters “animal”. The small addition patterns 1 to 8 are generally defined such that the selection rate of the “animal” additional character is higher than that of the “female” or “fireworker” additional character. In the no-addition pattern 1, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character “animal” is the highest. According to the added character appearing based on such an added character lottery table, the type of bonus is suggested, and the degree of expectation for the prize ball is also increased from the added number that is notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  Note that the selection rate for allocating additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various added characters, additional patterns that cannot be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the “animal” additional character cannot be selected only in the large additional pattern, the “female” additional character cannot be selected only in the no additional pattern, and the “fireworks” additional character is Alternatively, the selection rate may be defined so that only the medium addition pattern or the large addition pattern can be selected.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Transfer.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 15). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening 37 that is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred. The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts the winning determination random number value and the winning symbol determination random value in accordance with the detection signals from the first starting port switch 320 and the second starting port switch 330 and stores the big hit determination stored in the main ROM 62. With reference to a table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big winning and small winning lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process in S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the winning symbol is used, and a process for storing the determination result is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S71, S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated in accordance with the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process of storing control signals for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above-described steps. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and opens / closes the LED power source (common signal) for turning on the LED, the special prize opening shutter 37A, and the blade member 34. Supply solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed in accordance with a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. The update is done with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passing area has detected a winning. For example, when the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. The payout request command corresponding to is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a prize ball corresponding to a passing area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. Further, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area that is the trigger of the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S71. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 63 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start opening switch 320, and the second start opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start opening switch 320 or the second start opening When it is determined that there is an input from the mouth switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start opening winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first start port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S91, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  In S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S <b> 96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect display when it is determined that the winning effect is determined in the process of S95. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S <b> 100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second start port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port If the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S101, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S106.

  In S <b> 106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Big prize opening switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S <b> 110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the big prize opening 37 is detected based on a detection signal from the big prize opening count switch 370. . In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves to S111 and determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the big prize winning prize counter. The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a predetermined winning number. If this process ends, the process moves to S112.

  In S <b> 112, the main CPU 61 sets a big prize opening prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 37. Become. On the condition that such a large winning opening winning command is received, the sub-control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of extras displayed during the extra bonus to the expected number of winning balls described later. When this process is finished, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is finished.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 22, the numerical values shown at the sides of S <b> 121 to S <b> 128 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S121 to S128, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and allows one of the processes in S121 to S128 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. Details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination elapses, the process of S123 is set to be executed. Details of S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the process of S124 is set to be executed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main winning a prize mouth shutter read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening 37A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out data for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and outputs a signal for opening the big prize opening shutter 37A. It is supplied to the big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A. As a result, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 37. In other words, a winning game state is executed in which a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the special winning opening 37 changes into an open state in which the game ball 37 can easily receive a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to receive through an interval period) is repeated a predetermined number of times. Become. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which the special winning opening 37 is short-opened only once may be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. set. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S126 may be performed. Details of S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the special winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big prize opening in the case of not being the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  In S127, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S128. Details of S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S128.

  In S128, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. Details of S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flags to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in order, the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S121, S122, and S123 shown in FIG. 22 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and the process shown in FIG. The processes of S124, S126, and S125 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, it moves the process to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S133.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is greater than “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. If it is determined that there is more data, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S134. It is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not more than “0”, that is, no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If so, the process proceeds to S135.

  In S <b> 134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S <b> 135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S137, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S138, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probable variable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  The special gaming state is a probability change / short time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, but the special gaming state is at least one of a probability variation gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It may be in one game state. The non-special game state may include a case where the non-probability game state and the short-time game state are entered.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the process of S138, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process of S138. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  The main CPU 61 extracts a random number for determining the hit of the special symbol start storage area extracted in the winning of the game ball and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  Since the small hit can occur in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit determination disturbance stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area. The small hit determination process is performed based on the numerical value, but the small hit determination process may be performed based only on the random number value for the hit determination stored in one of the special symbol start storage areas.

  As described above, in the process of S139, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S140, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the small hit determination result is a big hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. Details of S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S141.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S156.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S154.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines the first special symbol jackpot symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation in FIG. 7) based on the winning symbol determination random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining whether the symbol corresponds to probability variation 1) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for determining the jackpot symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process of determining which of the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 is a symbol) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a win in the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 when it is not the small win.

  In S157, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the small bonus symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the first bonus symbol in FIG. 7) based on the random symbol value for winning symbol determination extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the small hit determination table. A process for determining whether or not the second special symbol small hit symbol allocation) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S158.

  In S158, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the small hit symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol of the determined first special symbol or second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol based on the data of the big hit symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the small special symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. . Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S160.

  In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 displays the data related to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37 regarding the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 37, that is, the probability change 1 according to the first special symbol or the probability variation 1 to the probability variation 6 according to the second special symbol, Processing for setting the corresponding data in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines in S161 that it is neither a big hit in S150 nor a small hit in S156, that is, it is a lost game, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a mode based on the lost symbol data. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating special symbol variation time management (value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes the symbol stop by the symbol display device control process, and derives the display result with the symbol determined by the special symbol determination process.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as the waiting time after decision, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as the waiting time after decision. . It should be noted that the same waiting time after determination may be used for both the winning symbol and the lost symbol, or the waiting time after fixing may be longer for the winning symbol than for the winning symbol. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it moves the process to S183. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S184.

  In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  In S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S186.

  In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S187. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S189.

  In S187, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating the game state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S190. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S194.

  In S190, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol of “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” is the right end of the big winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. It is shorter than 3000 ms, which is the shortest time to reach the portion, for example, 2500 ms.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Based on the data indicating the winning pattern included in the winning start display command, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an extra pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S202. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S202, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S203. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main CP is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S205.

  In S203, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S205.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol or the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the winning pattern (big winning opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol determined in S205. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S <b> 206, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S <b> 207, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S <b> 208, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S209.

  In S <b> 209, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 10 s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, if the big win symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 1”). If this process ends, the process moves to S210.

  In S <b> 210, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variables stored in this way drive the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the special winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S223.

  In step S <b> 223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S225.

  In S <b> 225, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S <b> 226, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S227.

  In S <b> 227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished. In this process as well, data corresponding to any of the open / close patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “1” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “1” or more, it moves the process to S234. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “1” or more, it moves the process to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the process to S233. In S232, a big prize opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way are for closing the prize winning shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times that the special winning opening is opened is 16 (16R). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S240. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, the time corresponding to interval pattern ad is set to the interval display time between rounds. If this process ends, the process moves to S238.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S239.

  In S <b> 239, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S <b> 242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S252. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the type of the winning game state that has been completed is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S256.

  In S 254, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a probability variation gaming state and a short-time gaming state. Note that the game state flag “00H” indicates the non-probability changing game state and the non-time-saving game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S <b> 255, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “10” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the hit end interval management process routine ends.

  In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of winning gaming state (big hit, small hit) that has been completed in addition to information indicating a gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Such a gaming state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S271.

  In step S <b> 271, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S272.

  In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) converts various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data into image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S274.

  In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In step S <b> 275, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S <b> 276, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is finished, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 33 and the timer interrupt process with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S291.

  In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S292.

  In step S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S303. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the decorative symbol variation display mode is determined. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S306.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits). )) Is basically a big hit game state when the same decorative symbols (numbers) are arranged. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”, for example, with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability of 1/10 when the second special symbol is “probability variation 1”), The decorative design is a uniform line of numbers “3” or “7”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probability 1” of the first special symbol is a uniform line of the numbers “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, and the jackpot symbol “2” of the second special symbol “ The decorative symbols corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” are numbers “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol has a specific appearance that is, for example, the number “135” as a combination of specific symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the loss is a non-specific random symbol. Note that the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the decorative symbol is a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probable variation 1” is a uniform “3” or “7”, and the jackpot symbol “probable variation”. The decorative symbols corresponding to “2” to “probability 6” may be aligned with “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”. Also, for example, in the case of “Large bonus”, the decorative symbol is “3” or “7”, and in the case of “Middle bonus”, the decorative symbol is “1” or “5”. In the case of “Small extra bonus” and “No extra bonus”, the decorative symbol is “2”, “4” or “6”, and the decorative symbol is stopped for each type of jackpot May be defined uniquely.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S308.

  In step S <b> 307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S309. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S310.

  In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. This winning effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the display command for opening the big prize opening as the read command, it moves the process to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. This in-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This winning effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any one of “01H” to “08H” to the winning effect pattern flag in accordance with the special symbol stop symbol designation information included in the received winning start display command. As for the winning effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to a normal bonus, and “02H” to “07H” are a large extra bonus, a middle extra bonus 1, 2, a small extra bonus 1, 2, and a no extra bonus, respectively. Correspondingly, “08H” corresponds to a small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S328.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern selection table in accordance with the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern selection table and performs a process of selecting one of the addition patterns. At this time, for example, any additional pattern can be selected using a random number for determining the effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the selected addition pattern in the addition pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 additional patterns are provided as the additional patterns, and each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4, the middle and upper additional patterns 1 to 8, the small additional patterns 1 to 8, and the non-additional pattern 1 has an additional pattern. Flags “01H” to “15H” correspond. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs a process of selecting the additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, any additional character can be selected using the random number for determining the effect. As the additional character, an additional character of “animal”, “female”, or “fireworker” is selected. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game, including the display of the added character determined based on the added character selection table and the display of the added number as the initial value. If this process ends, the process moves to S327.

  In S <b> 327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “240” in the prize ball number counter. This value of “240” corresponds to at least the number of prize balls that will be paid out in the round game of 16R, and is displayed as the initial value of the number of expected prize balls in the hit start interval. If the number of extras is not notified at all, that is, if there is no extra bonus, the initial value “240” is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data until the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Direction processing during round]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This in-round effect process is a process for determining whether or not to report the additional number for each round, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time a round game is executed (every time a winning prize opening display command is received), and the number of currently executed round games (the number of round games executed). This is a counter for indicating the number of times), and is basically counting the same value as the special winning opening opening number counter used in the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an extra bonus (including no extra bonus) is being executed based on the value of the winning effect pattern flag. If the value of the winning effect pattern flag corresponds to any of “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H” and it is determined that the bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting an additional pattern table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected addition pattern table, and performs a notification of the addition number based on the value of the addition pattern flag (addition pattern) and the value (round number) indicated by the round number counter. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that it is a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a round in which the additional number is notified, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for reporting the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, the added number is displayed together with the selected added character in the display area 4A during the corresponding round. If this process ends, the process moves to S335.

  In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the additional number to the prize ball number counter. Thereby, in the prize ball number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value “240”, and the counter value increases to the planned number of prize balls for each addition. For example, in the case of the large extra pattern 4, the extra number “135” is added at the 1R, 4R, and 7R, and the final award number “645” that is combined with the initial value “240” is displayed. Will be. The scheduled number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed immediately after addition to the winning ball number counter, and an effect corresponding to the addition is executed. Addition is displayed later. If this process ends, the process moves to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data during the round according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of an extra bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including background images for the 1R to 7R eyes and the 8R to 16R eyes. In the case of a normal bonus and a small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process is finished, the round production process routine is finished.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an extra bonus or no extra bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning effect pattern flag is not “02H” to “07H”, the process proceeds to S342.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the prize ball counter and resetting the counter value. The planned number of winning balls is displayed based on the value of the winning ball number counter, but the number of scheduled winning balls is not displayed as 0 immediately after the resetting of the winning ball number counter. At the same time, the display of the number of scheduled award balls can be switched. Further, when the value of the prize ball counter is reset, the scheduled prize ball number may not be displayed as “0”, but the display of the scheduled prize ball number itself may be hidden. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the winning gaming state. At this time, as end effect data, data of different effect contents is set according to any of normal bonus, extra bonus (including no extra bonus), and small hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “00H” in the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect process routine ends.

[Example of operation when over-winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over winning is generated at the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when an over winning is generated. 39 and 40 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (large winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from FIG. 3 for the sake of convenience. Although the behavior from the start of the hit start interval in the bonus to the interval between rounds after passing the 1R and after the end of the 2R is shown schematically, as an interval between the rounds between the 1R and 2R, for convenience, Unlike the one shown in FIG. 9, the interval pattern d is applied. The game balls are continuously fired immediately after the start of the hitting start interval, and after a uniform 3.1 s, the right winning portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding big winning prize opening 37 in the open state). Shall reach. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1),.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the big prize opening shutter 37A keeps the big prize opening 37 in a closed state until, for example, 2.5 s which is a hit start interval time elapses. That is, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3 s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A after the game ball is launched, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the game ball launching operation by right-hand strike is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A which closes the big prize opening 37.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, when the hit start interval time elapses, the 1R-th start is started, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened in the open arrow direction by retreating in the direction of the outlined arrow. And Even at this time, the game ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the game ball (0) launched immediately after the start of the hitting start interval is released from the large winning opening 37 that is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). Rolls to near right end.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes through the opened big winning opening 37 and falls downward, and a winning is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370. . That is, when a winning that reaches the prescribed winning number “1” is detected, the first round ends, and the interval between rounds before the start of the second round starts. At this time, the time from the start of the hit start interval until the winning of the game ball (0) launched immediately after that is about 3.2 s.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), along with the start of the interval between rounds, the big prize opening shutter 37A starts to project in the direction of the white arrow to make the big prize opening 37 closed again. To do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Moreover, since the launch interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big prize opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 during the round interval before the 2R start, the game ball (1) It reaches the right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the launch, and is approximately 0.56 s when calculated from the start point of the interval between rounds (the point in FIG. 39D). After the lapse.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to (I), the special prize opening shutter 37A closes the special prize opening 37 until the time defined as the interval between rounds, for example, 2.97s of the interval pattern d elapses. State. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the game balls (1) to (4) pass from the right side to the left side in a line. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) sequentially reach the right end portion of the big prize shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and roll at a speed of about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are in a state of being positioned with an interval of about one on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. In addition, when counting from the start time of the interval between rounds (the time point of FIG. 39D), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40G is approximately 1.22 seconds later and reaches the state of FIG. The time is after about 1.88 s, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (I) is after about 2.54 s.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the interval between rounds ends and the second round starts, and the prize winning opening shutter 37A has an operation time of about 0.01 s. By retreating in the direction of the white arrow, the grand prize winning opening 37 is again opened. At this time, the game balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass through the open big winning opening 37 all at once and fall downward, and the big winning opening counting switch 370 gives four wins. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the second round when the interval between rounds is over, three over-winnings are detected in addition to one of the predetermined number of winnings from four. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings are detected and the interval pattern a 0 .3 s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings is detected and no over winning is detected.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), the winning of the game ball (game ball (4) not shown in the figure in the figure) that has first reached the position of the big winning opening count switch 370 is detected, so that 2R The eye ends and the interval between rounds before the start of the 3R eye starts. At this time, the next game ball (5) is positioned in the vicinity of the right end of the special winning opening 37 that is in the transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), in the interval between rounds before the start of the third round, when the big prize opening shutter 37A completely closes the big prize opening 37 again, the game ball (5) The right end portion of the mouth shutter 37A will be reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on the interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over-winnings are realized in a predetermined round after the 2R.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows the operation timing in the extra bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. In FIG. 41, for convenience, the interval pattern d is applied as the interval between rounds between the 1R and 2R and after the end of the 2R, unlike the one shown in FIG. The “fired state” indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as “not fired”, and a state in which a firing operation is performed is denoted as “fired”. “Game state” indicates a round game and an interval in the big hit game state. “Required time” indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. “Big prize opening” indicates a closed state or an open state of the big prize opening 37. “The number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of game balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. The “elapsed time after the change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of game balls on the upper surface of the big prize opening shutter 37A is changed. The “shown state” indicates a symbol at the end of FIGS. 39 (A) to 40 (L). In addition, (E) and (K) shown as illustrated states are marked with “*” because the special winning opening 37 is not completely closed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the big hit is confirmed (the big hit starts) and the launch operation is started after about 0.1 s, the time until the game ball is actually fired is about 0.66 s. The time required for the game ball thus fired to reach the right end portion of the big prize opening shutter 37A is approximately 3.1 s. On the other hand, at the time when 2.5 s has passed as the winning start interval after the big hit is confirmed, the big winning opening 37 is in an open state. Thereby, the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning entry count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 s. That is, after the jackpot is confirmed, the launch operation is started, and the time until the first game ball thus fired is detected by the big prize count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = 3.96 s. The time 1.46 s obtained by subtracting the time 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the 1R opening time.

  Thereafter, an interval between rounds after the end of the first round starts, and the special winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 2.97 seconds of the interval pattern d. Then, in the closed prize opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the number of game balls located on the upper surface increases by about every 0.66 s until the start of the 2Rth when the prize winning opening 37 is opened again. Four game balls are supported by the special winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the 2R-th is started and the big winning opening 37 is opened, the winning of four game balls is detected. When a winning of one game ball is detected for the first time after about 0.1 s, the big winning opening 37 is closed and an interval between rounds after the end of the second round is started. A winning game ball is detected. As described above, if the interval time between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over winnings can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over winnings can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over winnings can be realized.

[Additional bonus screen display example]
42 to 44 are diagrams illustrating examples of screen display of an extra bonus. 42 shows a screen display example of an extra bonus corresponding to the large extra pattern 1, FIG. 43 shows an example of screen display of an extra bonus corresponding to the small extra pattern 5, and FIG. 44 corresponds to the no extra pattern 1. It is an example of a screen display of an extra bonus to be performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42A, when a large extra bonus corresponding to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the extra bonus and the great extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A, for example, “Fireworks” selected by lottery, appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1R eye is started, a display field 704 indicating the type of the added character is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the number of expected prize balls for each addition of the added number. And a display field 706 for displaying the first half round period as an “additional special zone” and a second half round period as a “prize ball increase zone” to be described later. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the end of the 16th round. For example, in the display field 704, “Fireworks” corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the end of the 16th round. On the other hand, in the display column 705, after the additional number is displayed in the center of the screen, the planned number of winning balls including the additional number is displayed in addition. In the large addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the 1R (see FIG. 12), in the 1R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 and the center of the screen is displayed. No additional number is displayed on. The display field 706 basically displays an “additional special zone” from the 1st to the 7th R, and a “prize ball increase zone” from the 8th R. As a result, the “addition-specific zone” is displayed in the 1R display column 706. In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the “addition bonus” may be simply displayed instead of the “prize ball increase zone” in the display column 706 after the 8th R. The “additional special zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the addition display of the number of scheduled prize balls is performed with a high probability. The “prize ball addition zone” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that the game is in a round game where over winning can be expected. The “extra bonus” displayed in the display field 706 indicates that a round game in which an over-winning due to the extra bonus cannot be expected. An “addition bonus” image 700 displayed at the top of the display area 4A indicates the start of the addition bonus.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the 2Rth is started, it is specified that the additional number “30” is displayed in the 2R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703A of “+30” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the third round is started, the expected number of winning balls “270” including the addition number 703A of “+30” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 3R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 3R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42E, when the 4R-th is started, it is specified that the additional number “105” is displayed in the 4R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, followed by an additional number 703B of “+105”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the 5R-th is started, the expected number of winning balls “375” including the addition number 703B of “+105” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Further, in the large addition pattern 1, since it is stipulated that the addition number is not displayed in the 5R (see FIG. 12), the addition character 702A and the addition number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 5R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the 6R-th is started, the same number of the expected prize balls “375” as in the previous round is continuously displayed in the display field 705. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed in the 6R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are not displayed in the center of the screen in the 6R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (H), when the 7th R is started, it is specified that the additional number “270” is displayed in the 7R in the large addition pattern 1 (see FIG. 12). In the center of the display area 4A, an additional character 702A is displayed, and then an additional number 703C of “+270” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th R is started, the expected number of winning balls “645” including the addition number 703C of “+270” displayed in the previous round is added to the display field 705. Is added and displayed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 42 (I) and 42 (J), a “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 8R to 16R. Further, in the large extra pattern 1, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 8th to the 16th R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are added to the center of the screen in the 8th to 16th R. Not displayed, the display field 705 displays that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “645”. Although a player cannot effectively generate an over-winning in the first half round by such a series of display of the number of extras and the number of scheduled prize balls, the second half round can be used as a guide for the number of scheduled prize balls displayed in addition. The game can be advanced while expecting an over-winning prize, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, when the small additional bonus 2 corresponding to the hit pattern 6 is determined as the additional bonus and the small additional pattern 5 is selected as the additional pattern, the display area 4A in the hit start interval is displayed. On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702B selected by lottery, for example, “animal” appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating the initial value “+240” of the expected number of prize balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “animal” corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed in the display field 704. The small addition pattern 5 also stipulates that the addition number is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12). In the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705. The added number is not displayed in the center.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the “upward specialization zone” is displayed in the display column 706 of the 1R to 7R. Further, in the small extra pattern 5, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed from the 1st to the 7th R (see FIG. 12), in the 1st to the 7th R, the extra character 702B and the extra number are in the center of the screen. Not displayed, the display field 705 continues to display the planned number of winning balls without changing from the initial value “240”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the 8th eye is started, “addition bonus” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the small additional pattern 5, since it is defined that the additional number “135” is displayed in the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the additional character 702B is displayed at the center of the screen of the display area 4A. , An additional number 703D of “+135” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th eye is started, a “prize ball increase zone” is displayed in the display field 706. In addition, in the display column 705, the planned number of winning balls “375” obtained by adding the additional number 703D of “+135” displayed in the previous round is added and displayed. Further, in the small extra pattern 5, since it is defined that the extra number is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the extra character 702A and the extra number are not displayed at the center of the screen after the 9R. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned number of winning balls has finally become “375”. Even with such a series of display of the number of extras and the expected number of winning balls, the player cannot substantially generate an overwin until the second half of the round (from 1R to 13R), but is added and displayed. The game can be advanced while expecting an over win until the final round (16R) with the planned number of winning balls as a guideline, and the fun of the game can be enhanced along with the effects.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44A, when an extra bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the extra bonus and the no extra pattern 1 is selected as the extra pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval On the top, an image 700 indicating the start of the extra bonus is displayed, and an image 701 for prompting a right strike is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702C, for example, “female” selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 showing the initial value “+240” of the planned number of winning balls is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the 1R eye is started, display columns 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this 1R, “female” corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed in the display field 704. In the no-addition pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in all rounds including the 1R (see FIG. 12), the initial value “240” is displayed in the display field 705 in the 1R. The additional number is not displayed in the center of the screen.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D, in the 1st to 16th eyes, the added character 702B and the added number are not displayed in the center of the screen, and the display field 705 shows the initial number of expected winning balls. The display is continued without changing from the value “240”. As shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D), the “addition bonus” is simply displayed in the display column 706 from the 8th R.

  The added character may appear in response to the operation of the effect button, and the added number may be displayed after the appearance. In addition, the added character appearing after the 8Rth and the added character appearing before the 7Rth may be different from each other in appearance, for example, even in the same person. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball wins a prize winning opening, “+15” corresponding to the number of winning balls may be displayed, and the number of payouts or the number of payouts may be displayed cumulatively. Further, regarding the expected number of winning balls, an assumed numerical value may not be directly displayed but indirectly suggested by, for example, light or sound. In “Additional Bonus”, the display of the number of scheduled award balls is displayed in the round following the round in which the number of additional balls is displayed. Alternatively, the number of scheduled prize balls may be added and displayed in rounds after the round in which the additional number is displayed.

[Effects of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of game balls that exceed the prescribed number of winnings in the next round game is the suppression unit 430 (large winning mouth shutter). 37A is controlled so as to flow into the upper surface of 37A. Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, the time is controlled so that two or more game balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. As a result, when the big winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closed state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, a larger number of game balls than the prescribed winning number that has flowed onto the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. Is led to the big winning opening 37, so that it is possible to realize an over winning in a predetermined round game and to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, by appropriately controlling the interval time between rounds in which the big prize opening 37 is closed between the desired round game without changing the opening time of the big prize opening shutter 37A, The number of over winnings can be adjusted appropriately. Specifically, with respect to the interval between rounds, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 which is a relatively short time (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is longer than that (interval patterns b to d) By providing 6 jackpot game states, the number of prize balls awarded based on over winnings can be varied according to the time between the rounds. Can be attached.

  In addition, an over winning prize that will be awarded to the grand prize opening 37 according to the number of prize balls given each time a game ball wins the big prize opening 37, the number of round games executed, and the interval time between rounds. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number, it is possible to pre-calculate the expected number of winning balls in the jackpot gaming state and report the scheduled number of winning balls as an additional number or initial value. As to whether or not the number of prize balls can be obtained, it is possible to notify of novel contents rich in unexpectedness and diversity, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the over-winning is basically realized by adjusting the interval time between the rounds after the 7th round. For example, by making the hit start interval time relatively long You may make it possible to make an over-winning from the 1Rth.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 112. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
First, the game board 1 used in the present embodiment (second embodiment) will be described.

  A game board 1 shown in FIG. 45 is another example of the game board 1 shown in FIG. The game board 1 shown in FIG. 45 is greatly different from the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 in that (1) instead of the second start port 33 and the blade member 34 that opens and closes the second start port 33, a normal electric motor is used. And (2) a point having an attacker unit 3500 instead of the variable winning device having the big prize opening 37, the big prize opening shutter 37A, the cover member 43, and the like. ) Instead of the movable effect device 42 provided with the upper movable effect member 42A, the lower movable effect member 42B, etc., there is an effect accessory unit 2000 (see FIG. 113), and (4) the game board 1 The logo unit 1000 is provided at the top.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 3400 is located below the passing gate 35. A general winning opening 40 is located below the ordinary electric accessory unit 3400, and an attacker unit 3500 is located below the general winning opening 40. The ordinary electric accessory unit 3400 includes a second start port 3440 and an ordinary electric accessory (more specifically, a blade member 3461). The second start port 3440 corresponds to the second start port 33 of the game board 1 shown in FIG. The ordinary electric accessory (wing member 3461) corresponds to the blade member 34 of the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The second start port 3440 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 3400. When a game ball wins the second starting port 3440, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 3440 has difficulty in winning a prize due to a change in posture of the blade member 3461 as a normal electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 3440 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 3461 is a member formed in a blade shape, and is a so-called ordinary electric accessory. The blade member 3461 is rotatably supported on the guide path of the ordinary electric accessory unit 3400 via a rotation shaft protruding in the front-rear direction. Thus, the blade member 3461 can open and close the entrance of the guide path. When the blade member 3461 opens the entrance of the guide path, the leading end side of the blade member 3461 enters the guide path. Thus, when the blade member 3461 opens the entrance of the guideway, the game ball is guided into the guideway that leads to the second start port 3440. The blade member 3461 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  The attacker unit 3500 is located below the general winning port 40 and on the right side of the first start port 32. The attacker unit 3500 includes a special prize opening 3540 and a special electric accessory (more specifically, a shutter 3610). The special winning opening 3540 corresponds to the special winning opening 37 of the game board 1 shown in FIG. The special electric accessory (shutter 3610) corresponds to the big prize opening shutter 37A of the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The big winning opening 3540 is provided inside the attacker unit 3500, and is opened in a hit gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The winning of a game ball to the big prize opening 3540 is detected by a big prize mouth count switch 370 (see FIG. 6). Note that the position at which the prize winning opening 3540 is arranged is not limited to the position described above, and can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  In the upper part of the attacker unit 3500, a slit (not shown) through which a game ball can enter is formed. This slit is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from right to left in front view. A shutter 3610 is disposed in the slit.

  The shutter 3610 corresponds to a so-called special electric accessory, and is configured to be able to advance and retract in the front-rear direction through a slit. When such a shutter 3610 advances forward, a first guiding path through which a game ball cannot enter the big prize opening 3540 is formed. Such a first guiding path can reduce the moving speed of the game ball moving along the first guiding path, and can create a situation in which a plurality of gaming balls are moving at a relatively low speed on the first guiding path. As described above, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway, the plurality of game balls are guided downward only by opening the shutter 3610 once, and the prize winning port 3540 is entered. You can win a prize. That is, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly. Even if the opening time of the shutter 3610 is short, if a lot of game balls stay on the shutter 3610, a lot of winnings can be generated. In addition, since a large number of game balls can be won at once, it is easy to generate more wins (so-called over wins) than the number that can be won in one round of a big hit game. Such a shutter 3610 is driven by a special prize opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6). In the attacker unit 3500 having such a configuration, the moving game ball can be appropriately guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path.

  The accessory unit 2000 is arranged so as to appear in front of the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. The accessory unit 2000 appears in front of the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a predetermined operation or light emission. The accessory unit 2000 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 to 135 as being applied to a gaming machine according to a third embodiment to be described later. In addition, a logo unit 1000 indicating a model name or the like is disposed in the upper front portion of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. The logo unit 1000 can emit light for each character. The logo unit 1000 will also be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 as being applied to a gaming machine according to a third embodiment to be described later.

  The accessory unit 2000 includes a level display unit 2100 in front of the center of the display area 4A. The level display unit 2100 is used for a predetermined effect (specifically, an effect for displaying the level of a reserved character described later). The level display unit 2100 is disposed below the display area 4A. The level display unit 2100 has 7 segment LEDs. The level display unit 2100 is configured such that the display control circuit 76 (see FIG. 6) can display numerical values “01” to “99” (level of reserved characters) on the 7-segment LED.

  In the present embodiment, the level display unit 2100 displays a numerical value on the 7-segment LED, but may display it on the display area 4A without using the 7-segment LED. Further, the level display unit 2100 is provided as a display device of the accessory unit 2000 separate from the liquid crystal display device 4, but may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 4.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIG. 46, the specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (second embodiment) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot gaming state is 1 / 319.688 when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), and when the probability is high (probability gaming state) ) Is 1 / 68.634. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the probability variation gaming state continues after winning the probability variation big hit gaming state until winning the falling lottery. The winning probability of the falling lottery is 1 / 275.361.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state, it becomes a short time gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the normal symbol hit probability is high, so that the winning of the second starting port 3440 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 3461 (electric support state). In the electric support state, at the end of the big hit game state, regardless of the game state (whether the game state is a probability change game state or a non-probability change game state), a minimum of 30 game counts (special symbol change count) is guaranteed. Has been. In addition, the electric support state is continued even after 30 times in the case of the probability variation gaming state. Then, when the falling lottery is won, the short-time gaming state is also ended at the same timing as the probability variation gaming state.

  The special symbols are divided into three types of jackpot symbols in the first special symbol and seven types of jackpot symbols in the second special symbol.

  Specifically, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, 11R is given as the number of rounds of the round game (of which 6R is the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the big prize opening). In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 1”, the planned number of winning balls is 900. Further, the probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 43/100. Note that the same number of rounds as the actual number of rounds may be determined without providing the number of rounds difficult to win.

  Further, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 2”, 10R (of which the actual number of rounds is 6R) is awarded as the number of rounds of the round game. In addition, in the big hit symbol “probability 2” of the first special symbol, the planned number of winning balls is 900. In addition, the probability (rush rate) of “probability variation 2” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 37/100.

  In addition, in the big special symbol “normal 1” of the first special symbol, 10R (of which the actual round number is 6R) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. In addition, in the big special symbol “normal 1” of the first special symbol, the planned number of winning balls is 900. In addition, the probability of having “normally 1” as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (rush rate) is set to 20/100.

  Thus, when the big hit is the result of the big hit determination triggered by the winning at the first starting port 32, after the big hit game is finished, it becomes a probability variation gaming state with a probability of 80/100, and normally with a probability of 20/100 It becomes a gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state).

  In addition, in the big special symbol “probability variation 3” of the second special symbol, 16R (of which 16R is the actual number of rounds) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. In addition, in the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probability variation 3”, the planned number of winning balls is 2400. Further, the probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 3” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

  In the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 4”, 9R (of which 9R is the actual number of rounds) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. Further, in the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 4”, the planned number of winning balls is 1350. Further, the probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 4” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 6/100.

  In addition, in the big special symbol “probability 5” of the second special symbol, 6R (of which the actual round number is 6R) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. Further, in the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 5”, the planned number of winning balls is 900. In addition, the probability (intrusion rate) of “probability variation 5” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  Further, in the big special symbol “probability 6” of the second special symbol, 3R (of which 3R is the actual number of rounds) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. In the second special symbol jackpot symbol “probability 6”, the planned number of winning balls is 450. In addition, the probability (rush rate) of “probability 6” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 14/100.

  Further, in the big special symbol “normal 2” of the second special symbol, 9R (of which the actual round number is 9R) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. In addition, in the big special symbol “normal 2” of the second special symbol, the planned number of winning balls is 1350. In addition, the probability (intrusion rate) of “normally 2” as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is set to 2/100.

  In addition, in the big special symbol “normal 3” of the second special symbol, 6R (of which the actual round number is 6R) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. In addition, in the big special symbol “normal 3” of the second special symbol, the planned number of winning balls is 900. In addition, the probability (intrusion rate) of “normal 3” as a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

  Also, in the big special symbol “normal 4” of the second special symbol, 3R (of which 3R is the actual number of rounds) is given as the number of rounds of the round game. Also, in the big special symbol “normal 4” of the second special symbol, the planned number of winning balls is 450. Further, the probability (rush rate) of “normally 4” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 13/100.

  Thus, when the big hit is the result of the big hit determination triggered by winning the second start opening 3440, after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation gaming state is established with a probability of 80/100, and the probability of 20/100 is normal. It becomes a gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state). Thus, in this embodiment, the probability (probability variable continuous rate) that probability variation symbols continue as jackpot symbols is set to 80/100.

  The number of winning prizes corresponds to a specified number of winnings that is an opportunity when the winning prize opening 3540 is changed from an open state to a closed state in one round. In this embodiment, the number of winning prizes (specified number of winnings) Is set to “10”. That is, when 10 winning prizes are counted in the round winning opening 3540 in one round, the shutter 3610 is changed from the open state to the closed state.

[Transition of gaming machine gaming state]
Next, the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine is performed while being associated with an effect (production mode) performed during the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the effect modes can be roughly divided into three modes: a normal mode, a big hit round (big hit middle mode), and a boss battle mode (high accuracy or short time mode).

  Specifically, when a game is first started, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state (more specifically, the non-probability / non-time-short gaming state), and the effect mode becomes the normal mode. In the normal mode, an effect based on the normal gaming state (normal mode effect) is performed. In addition, when the big hit is made in the normal mode, the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the round game is started, and the effect mode becomes the big hit round. In the big hit round, an effect based on the big hit game state (a big hit effect) is performed. In the following explanation, the big hit in the normal mode means the big hit in the first special symbol that basically changes in the normal mode, and the big hit in the boss battle mode basically changes in the boss battle mode. Indicates a big hit in the second special symbol.

  In the big hit game state, a round game is performed. When a round game is played, the number of real rounds (hereinafter, the number of real rounds is simply referred to as “number of rounds”) is determined (given) based on the jackpot symbol of the special symbol. For example, when a big hit is made in the normal mode, 6R is always given as the actual number of rounds. Thus, in the case of so-called first win, a 6R round game is always performed. Further, when a big hit is made in the boss battle mode (high accuracy or short time mode) (when the big hit round is changed from the boss battle mode), 3R, 6R, 9R or 16R is given as the actual round number. Thus, when a big hit is made during the electric support, any round game of 3R, 6R, 9R or 16R is performed.

  In addition, the round game includes a round game that informs the player in advance of the actual number of rounds (determined round game), a round game that does not inform the player in advance of the actual number of rounds (rank-up type round game), Is provided. In the present embodiment, a 16R round game is provided as a definitive round game. In addition, 3R, 6R, 9R and 16R round games are provided as rank-up type round games (rank-up games). When a rank-up round game is started, whether the round game continues as a big hit effect, for example, whether the round game ends at the 3rd round or continues (ranks up) after the 4th round An effect (a so-called “RUSH” or “rank-up effect”) that makes a decision about whether or not is performed. In this way, the rank-up type round game is performed with RUSH and ends with 3R at the shortest and continues to 16R at the longest.

  Also, in the big hit round, when the round game ends, the gaming state shifts from the big hit gaming state to either the probable / time-short game state or the non-probable / time-short game state, and the production mode is the boss battle mode (high-probability or short-time mode). It becomes. The boss battle mode includes a boss battle 1 mode that is performed when the gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state or a non-probable / short-time gaming state, and a boss battle 2 mode that is performed when the gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, Is provided. Thus, in the boss battle mode, an effect based on the boss battle 1 mode or the boss battle 2 mode (the boss battle mode effect) is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, the boss battle mode is either the boss battle 1 mode or the boss battle 2 mode.

  In the boss battle 1 mode, even if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, it is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, in the boss battle 2 mode, it is set so that the player can easily recognize that it is in the probability variation gaming state. In the boss battle 1 mode, a predetermined lottery is performed when the number of games (the number of changes in special symbols) is 10th and 20th, and when the lottery is won, the mode is changed to the boss battle 2 mode together with a specific effect. The This actually gives the player the impression that the gaming state has changed (promoted) from the non-probability changing gaming state to the probability changing gaming state, although the gaming state remains unchanged and remains unchanged. be able to.

  Further, in the boss battle 1 mode, when the game state is the probability variation game state, when the number of games (the number of times of special symbol fluctuation) reaches the 30th time, the boss battle 2 mode is started from the 31st time without performing the predetermined lottery. The mode is changed.

  In addition, in the boss battle 1 mode and the boss battle 2 mode, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, a falling lottery is performed for each variation of the special symbol. When the falling lottery is won, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state. In the short-time gaming state (electric support state), at least 30 special symbol variations are guaranteed after the big hit game, regardless of the result of the falling lottery in the probability variation gaming state. In addition, the short-time gaming state (electric support state) is continued even when the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds 30 when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, the normal mode effect is performed in the effect mode according to the transition of the game state, the effect during the big hit is performed in the big hit round, the boss battle mode (the boss battle 1 mode and the boss battle 2 mode). Boss battle mode production is performed. Note that these effects may be performed when a character (holding character) indicated by the holding image appears in the display area 4A.

  For example, in the boss battle 1 mode and the boss battle 2 mode, as the boss battle mode effect, an effect (boss battle effect) in which the reserved character battles with the enemy character (boss) is performed. In the boss battle effect, when the reserved character wins the enemy character, the player is informed that it is a big hit, and the gaming state shifts to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the boss battle effect, when the reserved character is defeated by the enemy character, the player is informed that it is lost.

  In addition, when the game state is non-probability change / short-time game state, when the special symbol change count reaches 30 times, and when the special symbol change count is 31 times or more, the winning lottery is won The boss battle production is always performed. In such a case, if the big hit determination is lost, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state, and the boss battle mode (the boss battle 1 mode or the boss battle 2 mode) is changed to the normal mode.

[Mode background]
In the gaming machine, the background image (mode background) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is displayed corresponding to the effect mode. Thus, by displaying the mode background corresponding to each mode on the liquid crystal display device 4, it is possible to notify (or suggest) the current gaming state (sub-state) to the player. Hereinafter, the mode background will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the production mode is the normal mode, the mode background is normally 1 (town), normal 2 (outside), normal 3 (dungeon 1F), normal 4 (dungeon 2F), or Any of normal 5 (normal boss) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Moreover, when the production mode is the boss battle 1 mode among the boss battle modes, the boss battle 1 is displayed as the mode background. Moreover, when the production mode is the boss battle 2 mode in the boss battle mode, the boss battle 2 is displayed as the mode background. When the effect mode is a big hit round, the big hit is displayed as the mode background. These mode backgrounds are associated with numbers 1 to 8, respectively.

  For mode background 1 of normal 1 (town), for example, a townscape surrounded by a castle wall is displayed as a background image. In addition, the normal 2 (outside) of the mode background 2 is displayed as a background image, for example, outside the city wall. In addition, the normal 3 (dungeon 1F) of the mode background 3 displays, for example, the underground 1F of the cave as a background image. In addition, the normal background 4 (dungeon 2F) of the mode background 4 displays, for example, a cave basement 2F as a background image. Further, for the normal 5 (normal boss) of the mode background 5, for example, the background of the battle with the enemy character is displayed as the background image. Since the mode backgrounds 1 to 5 are mode backgrounds in the normal mode, they are displayed when the value of the probability change flag is “0” and the value of the time reduction flag (electric support state) is “0”. .

  The mode backgrounds 1 to 5 are sequentially shifted as the number of pseudo-continuations (the number of variable displays after temporary stop display) increases when the pseudo-continuations are performed. For mode backgrounds 1 to 5, for example, mode background 1 (normally 1 (town)) is the most basic pattern. For example, when a total of four pseudo-runs are started in mode background 1 (normally 1 (town)), mode background 2 (normally 2 (outside)) is displayed in the first pseudo-run (pseudo 1). In addition, the mode background 3 (usually 3 (dungeon 1F)) is displayed in the second pseudo-continuation (pseudo 2). In addition, the mode background 4 (usually 4 (dungeon 2F)) is displayed in the third pseudo-continuation (pseudo 3). Also, the mode background 5 (normal 5 (normal boss)) is displayed in the fourth pseudo-continuation (pseudo 4). As described above, the mode background (production stage) is ranked as the mode background 5 · 4 · 3 · 2 · 1 according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. That is, the mode background (production stage) displays (suggests) the degree of expectation of the big hit. In this way, the mode background (effect stage) can be displayed by changing to the higher mode background (effect stage) in the ranking by executing the pseudo-ream.

  In the present embodiment, the mode background in which the pseudo-continuation is started and the order in which the mode backgrounds 1 to 5 are shifted are not limited to the above-described example, and are variously set. Further, the mode background transition is not limited to the execution of the pseudo-series, and the transition may be performed even when the pseudo-series is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-ream is started, a level-up effect described later is performed according to the transition of the mode background. In addition, when the final mode background shifted by the pseudo-ream is mode background 4 (final arrival background is usually 4 (dungeon 2F)), the teammate character battles with the enemy character (middle boss) (described later). Boss battle production). Further, when the final mode background shifted by the pseudo-ream is the mode background 5 (the final arrival background is usually 5 (normal boss)), the effect that the ally character battles with the enemy character (large boss) (described later) Large boss battle production).

  In the boss battle 1 of the mode background 6 and the boss battle 2 of the mode background 7, for example, the background of the battle with the enemy character is displayed as the background image. Since the boss battle 1 of the mode background 6 is the mode background of the boss battle 1 mode among the boss battle modes, the value of the probability change flag is “0” or “1”, and the value of the time reduction flag (electric support state) is “ 1 ”is displayed. Further, since the boss battle 2 of the mode background 7 is a mode background of the boss battle 2 mode among the boss battle modes, the value of the probability variation flag is “1” and the value of the time reduction flag (electric support state) is “1”. Is displayed when. Note that the boss battle 1 of the mode background 6 is changed to the boss battle 2 of the mode background 7 when winning a predetermined lottery when the value of the probability variation flag is “1”. The boss battle 2 is displayed when the value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is “1”. However, if the boss battle 2 is exceptionally won at the start of the fluctuation during the execution of the boss battle 2, it will be displayed at that time. The value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is set to “0”, and the boss battle 2 is executed in the state where the value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is set to “0”.

  For the big hit of the mode background 8, a big hit effect is displayed as a background image. The jackpot of the mode background 8 is a jackpot round mode background, and is therefore displayed when the value of the probability variation flag is “0” and the value of the time reduction flag (electric support state) is “0”. . In addition, although the contents of the effect of the big hit effect vary depending on the type, it is omitted here.

[Example of game machine screen display]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, various effects such as a pre-reach effect, a reach effect, and a variable display of the decorative symbol 500 are performed using the display area 4A and the level display unit 2100 of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  FIG. 49A shows a display example of the liquid crystal display device 4 (display area 4A and level display unit 2100). As shown in FIG. 49A, three decorative symbols 500 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped on the upper right portion of the display area 4A. The fluctuating display means a state in which any one of the three decorative symbols 500 is displayed so as to flow up and down without being completely stopped or sequentially enlarged. The stop display means a state in which all three decorative symbols 500 that have been variably displayed are stopped and a combination of these symbols is shown. In the following description, the stop display related to the decorative symbol 500 and the special symbol may be referred to as “determined display”. The variable display and finalized display of the decorative symbol 500 are synchronized with the special symbol's variable display and finalized display except in the case of a pseudo-ream.

  The character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610 are displayed below the display area 4A. In the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610, a hold image (character hold image) is displayed based on the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 according to the start-up storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The In the following description, the hold information related to the character hold image is simply referred to as “hold information”. Specifically, the hold information includes information such as “Random value for winning determination”, “Random value for determining winning symbol”, etc., but for convenience, the determination of the hit type based on the random number value is included. It is assumed that the result is included in the hold information. In the following description, the image of the character (holding character) indicated by the character holding image may be simply referred to as the character name (for example, “holding character A”). In this way, the display area 4A is an area (decoration pattern 500) that is different from the area for displaying the character reserved image (the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610) and the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610. And display areas (variable display areas) for displaying various effects by holding characters.

  In the case of the quasi-ream, the decorative symbol 500 appears to be stopped once or several times during the period from when the special symbol is variably displayed based on one start-up memory until the final symbol is displayed. May be in a temporary stop display state that cannot be said to be a complete stop display state due to vibration or the like. For example, in the case of the pseudo-ream 2, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state after the variable display, and is finally finally displayed through the variable display. In the case of the quasi-ream 3, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state next to the variable display, and after that, through the variable display, is again in the temporary stop display state. . In the case of the quasi-ream 4, the decorative symbol 500 is in a temporary stop display state after the variable display, and then in the temporary stop display state again through the variable display, and then in the temporary stop display state again through the variable display. Then, after that, the final display is made through the variable display.

  The character display area 600 is used for displaying the hold information corresponding to the starting memory as the image of the character hold image during the change display of the decorative pattern 500 (the first change display in the case of the pseudo-ream). This is an area and is located at the lower left end of the display area 4A. Further, when the decorative symbol 500 is finally confirmed and displayed, and at least one character hold image is displayed in the hold character display area 610, the hold character display area 610 moves to the character display area 600. And one character hold image is displayed to move.

  The reserved character display area 610 is an area for individually displaying the hold information corresponding to the first to fourth start memories as an image of the character hold image, and is positioned on the right side of the character display area 600. In the reserved character display area 610, the most recently stored first reserved information is displayed as the leftmost character reserved image, and the second to fourth reserved information are sequentially arranged on the right side of the leftmost character reserved image. Displayed with a hold image. In the reserved character display area 610, every time the leftmost character reserved image indicating the first reserved information is deleted, it is moved and displayed in the character display area 600, and the remaining 2-4th reserved information is displayed. Are displayed so as to shift to the left side.

  Hereinafter, in the reserved character display area 610, an area where the first reserved information is displayed as the character reserved image is “first reserved character display area 610a”, and the second reserved information is displayed as the character reserved image. The area is “second reserved character display area 610b”, the third reserved information is displayed as a character reserved image, the “third reserved character display area 610c”, and the fourth reserved information is displayed as a character reserved image. The areas may be referred to as “fourth reserved character display areas 610d”, respectively.

  The level display unit 2100 displays the level of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600. Here, the level of the reserved character is a numerical value of the strength of the reserved character (for example, the degree of expectation of the victory in the battle with the enemy character), and shows the degree of expectation of the jackpot. The level of the reserved character is displayed as a numerical value from “01” to “99”, and a higher value indicates that the reserved character is stronger (higher expectation of victory), that is, a higher probability of jackpot. . In FIG. 49A, the level of the reserved character A is “10”. Note that the level of the reserved character may be raised by a level-up effect when a changing effect content or pseudo-ream is performed.

[Character hold image]
FIG. 49B shows a display example of the reserved image (character reserved image) displayed in the display area 4A. In the present embodiment, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image appears in various effects such as a pre-reach effect, a reach effect, and a variable display of the decorative symbol 500. The character hold image displays the face image of the hold character, the name (feature) of the hold character, and the current state and ability (status) of the hold character.

  Specifically, the face image of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is displayed in the lower left area AP1 of the character reserved image. In this way, by displaying the reserved character on the character reserved image, even if it is displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (even before moving to the character display area 600), the decorative symbol 500 is displayed. The character that appears at the beginning of the fluctuation can be suggested.

  In addition, “HP” (hit points) is displayed as the status of the reserved character in the upper right area AP2 of the character reserved image. “HP” is a numerical value of the physical strength of the reserved character. In the present embodiment, “HP” is displayed as a numerical value from “1” to “999”, and a larger value indicates that there is physical strength. When “HP” is displayed higher than usual according to the reserved character, it is suggested that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. In addition, “HP” can increase the expectation level of jackpots in the rough eyes, the order, the reverse eyes, etc. according to the characteristics of the reserved character.

  In the character reserved image, the area AP3 below the area AP2 displays “MP” (magic point) as the status of the reserved character. “MP” is a numerical value of the magic power (magic strength) of the reserved character. In the present embodiment, “MP” is displayed as a numerical value from “1” to “999”, and a larger value indicates that the magic power is stronger. When “MP” is displayed higher than usual according to the reserved character, it is suggested that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. In addition, “MP” can increase the degree of expectation of a big hit in the rough eyes, the order, the reverse eye, etc. according to the characteristics of the reserved character.

  In the character reserved image, the name (feature) of the reserved character is displayed in the area AP4 below the area AP3. In this way, the name (feature) of the reserved character displayed in the area AP1 can be notified to the player. In the area AP4, a character name (A here) may be displayed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, by displaying the numerical values of “HP” and “MP” and the name (feature) of the reserved character by the character holding image, the expected degree of victory in the battle with the enemy character, that is, The expectation degree of jackpot can be notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a word alignment such as “315” (highest) is displayed as a combination of numerical values in “HP” or “MP”, the degree of expectation of jackpot can be increased. Thereby, since the degree of expectation of the big hit can be notified by the effect having rarity, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  FIG. 50 shows the types of reserved characters indicated by the character reserved image. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, a plurality (9 types in this embodiment) of characters are provided as reserved characters indicated by the character reserved image. The characteristics, growth type, and status expectation are defined for the plurality of reserved characters. The characteristics indicate the occupation and the type of the character itself. Further, the status expectation level defines the states of “HP” and “MP” that suggest the expectation level of jackpot depending on the reserved character.

  The growth type is a classification of how to increase the level of the reserved character in the level-up production. As for growth types, those with the tendency of holding characters tending to rise in the middle of a given period are “medium-type”, those that tend to rise in the second half are “second-half”, and average from the first half to the second half Those that tend to go up are defined as “balanced”. In addition, those that have confirmed the jackpot are defined as “determined types”, and those other than these (mid-board type, second half type, balanced type, and definite type) are defined as “special types”.

  In this embodiment, as a plurality (9 types) of reserved characters, reserved character A, reserved character B, reserved character C, reserved character D, reserved character E, reserved character F, reserved character G, reserved character H, and reserved character I Is provided.

  The reserved character A is a warrior and the growth type is a balance type. The reserved character A is defined such that if “HP” is high, it is a chance and the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. In addition, the reserved character B is a wizard and has a growth type of the middle board. The reserved character B is defined to have a chance when “MP” is high and to have a high expectation degree of jackpot. The reserved character C is a warrior and has a growth type of the latter half. The reserved character C is defined such that if “HP” is high, it is a chance and the expectation of the big hit is high. The reserved character D is a monk and the growth type is a balance type. The reserved character D is defined such that if “MP” is high, it is a chance and the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. In addition, the reserved character E is a knight and the growth type is a middle board type. The reserved character E is defined to be a chance when the values of “HP” and “MP” are close to each other, and the expectation level of the big hit is high. The reserved character F is a zombie and the growth type is the latter half type. The reserved character F is defined such that when “HP” is low, it is a chance and the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. The reserved character G is a sage and has a special growth type. The reserved character G is a chance regardless of the state of “HP” and “MP”, and is defined so that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. The reserved character H is a hero and has a special growth type. The reserved character H is a chance regardless of the state of “HP” and “MP”, and is defined so that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. The reserved character I is a god and has a definite growth type. The reserved character I is defined so that the values of “HP” and “MP” are both fixed to “777” and displayed only in the case of a big hit.

  Note that the reserved character G and the reserved character H are set so as to be easily displayed when the expectation of the big hit is high. Therefore, hereinafter, the reserved character G and the reserved character H are referred to as “chance characters”, the reserved character A, the reserved character B, the reserved character C, the reserved character D, the reserved character E, and the reserved character F are referred to as “normal characters”, respectively. There is a case. The reserved character I is set to be selected only in the case of a big hit. Accordingly, hereinafter, the reserved character I may be referred to as a “determined character”.

  In this way, a plurality of reserved characters are provided, and the reserved characters are defined to have different characteristics. In this way, when a reserved character is displayed in the display area 4A, different display modes can be used depending on the characteristics of the reserved character.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), if the reserved character displayed in the display area 4A is the reserved character A, it appears with a sword because it is a warrior. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51A, if the reserved character displayed in the display area 4A is the reserved character B, the character is equipped with a magic wand because it is a magician. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), if the reserved character displayed in the display area 4A is the reserved character C, the character appears as a warrior with a bow and arrow. As described above, the reserved character displayed in the display area 4A has a display mode (appearance) corresponding to the reserved character, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  The character hold image displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 is set so that the hold character indicated by one character hold image does not overlap the hold character indicated by another character hold image. Has been. Specifically, for example, when the character hold image indicating the reserved character A (warrior) is displayed in the character display area 600, the reserved character A (warrior) is displayed in the other display area (hold character display area 610). Character hold image is not displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image appears on the liquid crystal display device 4, and various effects such as the pre-reach effect, the reach effect, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 500 are performed. In the following, a display example of an effect using a reserved character appearing on the liquid crystal display device 4 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 52A, it is assumed that the reserved character A appears in the display area 4A by displaying the reserved character image indicating the reserved character A in the character display area 600. . In addition, it is assumed that a pre-reach effect is performed (three decorative symbols 500 are variably displayed).

  Thus, when the pre-reach effect is started, a message “Destroy the enemy character! Reach by destroying!” Is displayed in the display area 4A, and the enemy character appears in front of the reserved character A. As a result, a battle (battle effect) between the reserved character A and the enemy character is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the reserved character A wins the enemy character (when the enemy character is defeated) in the battle effect, a message “Destroy !!” is displayed and 2 Both decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as “7” (same number), and reach is reached. On the other hand, when the reserved character A is defeated by the enemy character, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not shown) without reaching reach in the change.

  In FIG. 52, the reserved character A (warrior) is equipped with a sword, and swings down the sword to destroy the enemy character. However, as described above, when a reserved character is displayed in the display area 4A, the display mode differs depending on the characteristics of the reserved character. For example, in FIG. 53A, a reserved character B indicating the reserved character B is displayed in the character display area 600, so that the reserved character B appears in the display area 4A. In such a case, the holding character B (the magician) is equipped with a magic wand and blows an electric shock from the wand to destroy the enemy character. In FIG. 53 (b), the reserved character C indicating the reserved character C is displayed in the character display area 600, so that the reserved character C appears in the display area 4A. In such a case, the reserved character C (the warrior) is equipped with a bow and arrow, and blows the arrow to destroy the enemy character. As described above, in the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect utilizing the characteristics of the reserved character is performed according to the characteristics of the reserved character.

  Note that the reserved character displayed in the display area 4A is not limited to one person. FIG. 54A shows a display example of a boss battle effect to be described later. Thus, in the boss battle effect, the message “Destroy BOSS!” Is displayed, and a plurality (three in FIG. 54A) of reserved characters appear in the display area 4A. When a plurality of reserved characters appear, the plurality of reserved characters are the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 and the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610. (In more detail, at least one reserved character among the reserved characters indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610). That is, when a plurality of reserved characters appear, the reserved characters indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 are always included. In the following, a plurality of reserved characters displayed in the display area 4A may be collectively referred to as “party”.

  Thus, when a plurality of reserved characters appear, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 becomes a party leader. That is, in FIG. 54A, the reserved character A becomes a party leader. The party leader plays a central role in the boss battle production, such as making the final attack to decide whether to win or lose. Further, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610 becomes a party member. In FIG. 54A, a reserved character B and a reserved character C appear as party members.

  When such a party is displayed, the party leader (hold character A) is displayed in the middle of the party (between the hold character B and the hold character C). This makes it easier for the player to know which reserved character the party leader (hereinafter simply referred to as “leader”) is.

  FIG. 54B shows a display example when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is the reserved character B. As described above, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is the reserved character B, the leader becomes the reserved character B.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables stored in the main ROM 62 of the main control circuit 60 will be described.

[Random number judgment table]
The hit random number determination table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when a random number value (big hit determination random number value) based on winning of the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440 is extracted. In the hit random number determination table, determination value data is associated with a jackpot determination random value for which a predetermined width is set for each probability change flag indicating whether the gaming state is a probability change state or a non-probability change state. The jackpot determination random number value is a random value of the jackpot determination random number counter, and indicates a random value for determining whether or not it is a jackpot (to indicate a special symbol lottery result). Whether or not it is a big win is a result of a lottery triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440. The jackpot determination random number is defined in the range of “0” to “65535”.

  The probability variation flag is a flag that is stored in the main RAM 63 and indicates whether or not the probability variation state is selected as the gaming state after the big hit gaming state, and also indicates whether or not the probability variation state. For example, when the value of the probability variation flag is “0 (off)”, it indicates that the probability variation state is not established (non-probability variation state), and when the value of the probability variation flag is “1 (on)”, the probability variation state is indicated. Show. Whether or not the state is a probability variation state is flag-managed by the main control circuit 60, and as shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot probability is defined so as to differ depending on whether or not the state is a probability variation state. Note that the selection rate shown in FIG. 55 represents the probability that the corresponding determination value data is selected.

  More specifically, when the jackpot random number determination table is the probability variation flag “0” (non-probability variation state), the jackpot determination value data is associated with the jackpot determination random number values “0” to “204” (width 205). Loss determination value data is associated with random numbers other than this. In the jackpot random number determination table, when the probability variation flag is “1” (probability variation state), the jackpot determination value data is associated with the jackpot determination random number values “0” to “954” (width 955). Loss determination value data is associated with the random value.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning in the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440 in a non-probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit (hereinafter also referred to as a big hit probability) is about 1/319. On the other hand, when winning in the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440 in the probability variation state, the big hit probability is about 1/68. In the present embodiment, a normal symbol winning table (not shown) is stored in the main ROM 62. In the normal symbol winning table, the random number for determining the normal symbol is set so that the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is 1/100 when the probability is low (non-short-time state) and 1/1 when the probability is high (time-short state). It is prescribed.

[Falling random number judgment table]
The falling random number determination table shown in FIG. 56 is referred to when a random number value (falling determination random number value) based on winning of the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440 is extracted in the probability variation state. In the falling random number determination table, determination value data is associated with a falling determination random value set with a predetermined width in a probability variation flag in which the gaming state indicates a probability variation state. The fall determination random number value is a random value of the fall determination counter, and indicates a random value for determining whether or not to fall. Whether or not it falls is a result of a lottery triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440. The fall determination random number value is defined in the range of “0” to “65535”.

  Note that the fall random number determination table is referred to only when the gaming state is the probability variation state. Therefore, in the falling random number determination table, the falling determination value data or the non-falling determination value data is associated only with the falling random value when the probability variation flag is “1” (probability variation state).

  More specifically, when the fall random number determination table is the probability variation flag “1” (probability variation state), the fall determination value data is associated with the fall random number values “0”-“237” (width 238), Non-falling determination value data is associated with other random values.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when winning in the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440 in the probability variation state, the fall probability is 1/275.

[Design determination table]
The symbol determination table shown in FIG. 57A is referred to when a random number value (symbol random value) based on winning of the first start port 32 is extracted. The symbol determination table shown in FIG. 57 (b) is referred to when a random number value (symbol random value) based on the winning of the second start port 3440 is extracted. In the symbol determination table, a symbol selection command and a symbol designation command are associated with a symbol random value for which a predetermined width is set for each determination value data indicating whether or not a big hit. The design random number value is a random value of the design determination random number counter, and indicates a random value for determining a design corresponding to the lottery result. The winning selection symbol command is a command corresponding to a symbol random number value, and indicates a command for specifying a big hit symbol determined according to the type of big hit at the time of winning. The symbol designation command is a command corresponding to the judgment value data and designates a special symbol displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the symbol determination table, a table for the first start port that is referred to when a random value based on the winning of the first starting port 32 is extracted, and a random value based on the winning of the second starting port 3440 are extracted. And a table for the second start port that is referred to in the case of being performed.

  More specifically, in the symbol determination table for the first start opening, the symbol selection command “z0” is associated with the symbol random number values “0” to “42” in the jackpot determination value data, and the symbol designation The command “zA0” is associated. In addition, the symbol random number values “43” to “79” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z1” and the symbol designation command “zA1”. In addition, the symbol random selection values “80” to “99” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z2” and the symbol designation command “zA2”. Thus, in this embodiment, when winning the first start port 32 and winning a big hit, the probability that the winning selection symbol command “z0” is selected is 43/100, and the winning selection symbol command “ The probability that “z1” is selected is 37/100, and the probability that the hit selection symbol command “z2” is selected is 20/100.

  The symbol designation command “zA0” is a command corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability change 1” of the first special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA1” is a command corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability change 2” of the first special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA2” is a command corresponding to the big hit symbol “normally 1” of the first special symbol.

  Also, in the symbol determination table for the first start port, the symbol designation command “zA3” is associated with the symbol random number values “0” to “99” in the loss determination value data.

  In the symbol determination table for the second start port, in the jackpot determination value data, the symbol random number values “0” to “50” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z3” and the symbol designation command “zA4”. Are associated. In addition, the symbol random number values “50” to “55” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z4” and the symbol designation command “zA5”. Also, the symbol random selection values “56” to “65” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z5” and the symbol designation command “zA6”. In addition, the symbol random number values “66” to “79” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z6” and the symbol designation command “zA7”. Also, the symbol random selection values “80” to “81” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z7” and the symbol designation command “zA8”. In addition, the symbol random number values “82” to “86” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z8” and the symbol designation command “zA9”. In addition, the symbol random number values “87” to “99” are associated with the hit selection symbol command “z9” and the symbol designation command “zA10”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning at the second start port 3440 and winning a big win, the probability that the winning selection symbol command “z3” is selected is 50/100, and the winning selection symbol command “ The probability that “z4” is selected is 6/100, the probability that the winning selection symbol command “z5” is selected is 10/100, and the probability that the winning selection symbol command “z6” is selected is 14/100. 100, the probability of selecting the winning selection symbol command “z7” is 2/100, the probability of selecting the winning selection symbol command “z8” is 5/100, and the winning selection symbol command “z7” The probability that “z9” is selected is 13/100.

  The symbol designating command “zA4” is a command corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probability 3” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA5” is a command corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability variation 4” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA6” is a command corresponding to the jackpot symbol “probability 5” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA7” is a command corresponding to the big hit symbol “probability variation 6” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA8” is a command corresponding to the big special symbol “normal 2” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA9” is a command corresponding to the big special symbol “normal 3” of the second special symbol. The symbol designation command “zA10” is a command corresponding to the big special symbol “normal 4” of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the symbol determination table for the second start port, the symbol designation command “zA11” is associated with the symbol random number values “0” to “99” in the loss determination value data.

[Big hit type determination table]
The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 58 is a table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the number of rounds, the probability variation flag, the hourly flag, and the hourly number of times are associated as jackpot types for each winning symbol selection symbol command.

  More specifically, in the jackpot type determination table, in the case of the winning hour selection symbol command “z0”, 6 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and the probability variation flag “1” and the short time flag “1” are associated. ing. In the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z1”, 6 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “1” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. Further, in the case of the winning selection symbol command “z2”, 6 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “0” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. In the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z3”, 16 rounds are associated with the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “1” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. In the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z4”, 9 rounds are associated with the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “1” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. In the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z5”, 6 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “1” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. In the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z6”, 3 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “1” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. Further, in the case of the winning time selection symbol command “z7”, 9 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “0” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. Further, in the case of the winning selection symbol command “z8”, 6 rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “0” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated. In the case of the winning selection symbol command “z9”, three rounds are associated as the number of rounds, and a probability variation flag “0” and a time reduction flag “1” are associated.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is “z0”, “z1”, “z3”, “z4”, “z5”, “z6”, the game after the end of the big hit gaming state The probability variation state is selected as the state. In the present embodiment, the probability variation state ends when a big hit is won or when a fall determination is won, and the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the non-probability variation state.

  The time reduction flag is a flag that is stored in the main RAM 63 and indicates whether or not the time reduction state is selected as the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and also indicates whether or not the time reduction state. For example, when the value of the time reduction flag is “0 (off)”, it indicates that the time reduction state is not (non-time reduction state), and when the value of the time reduction flag is “1 (on)”, the time reduction state is indicated. Show. Whether or not the time is short is managed by the main control circuit 60 as a flag. As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, since the time-short flag “1” is associated with all the winning time selection symbol commands, a game is always made (with a probability of 100/100) after the big hit gaming state. As the state, a time-short state in which the number of time reductions is 30 is selected.

  Here, the number of time reductions indicates the upper limit value of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time reduction state started after the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the short-time state ends when the probability variation state ends, when a big win is won, or when there is a change in the special symbol for the short-time number shown in the hit type determination table. The game state shifts from the short-time state to the non-short-time state. In addition, after shifting to the probability variation state, even if the fall determination is won and the probability variation state is shifted to the non-probability variation state, the time reduction state (that is, the electric support state) continues for 30 times. In other words, after the big hit gaming state is completed, 30 electric support states are guaranteed regardless of the probability variation state or the non-probability variation state. In addition, after transitioning to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, when 30 times have passed without winning the fall determination, the electric support state is also continued as it is (after 31 times). In addition, when the electric support state continues after the 31st time, when the fall determination is won, the gaming state shifts from the probability change / short time state to the non-probability change / non-time reduction state, and the electric support state ends.

[Variation pattern determination table]
59 to 61 are tables for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern. In the variation pattern determination table, whether or not (whether or not, that is, whether or not the winner has been won), special figure type (the special symbol lottery result is triggered by either the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440) ), State (gaming state), and number of changes (number of changes of special symbols in the short time state that starts after the end of the big hit gaming state), select the variation pattern type, and finally based on the selected variation pattern type Variation pattern is selected. Note that the variation pattern includes a pattern in the first half of the variation pattern and a pattern in the second half of the variation pattern.

  More specifically, in the case where the result is a failure, the gaming state is normal (non-probable change) regardless of which of the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440 is a win for the special symbol lottery result. State and non-time-short state), the fluctuation pattern types include normal fluctuation (code “00H”), pseudo 1 to pseudo 2 normal reach (code “01H”), and pseudo 1 to pseudo 2SP (code “02H”). ) And four variation pattern types, pseudo 3 to pseudo 4SP (code “03H”). Any one of these variation pattern types is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, these variation pattern types are set to be easily selected in the order of code “00H”, code “01H”, code “02H”, and code “03H”.

  In addition, in the case where the result is a failure, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440, the gaming state is the probability change time (probability change state and time reduction state). ), And when the number of times of fluctuation is other than the 10th, 20th, and 30th times, the fluctuation pattern type is referred to as normal fluctuation (code “04H”) and out-of-balance battle fluctuation (code “05H”). Two types of variation pattern are associated with each other. Any one of these variation pattern types is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, these variation pattern types are set to be easily selected in the order of code “04H” and code “05H”.

  In addition, in the case where the result is a failure, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440, the gaming state is the probability change time (probability change state and time reduction state). ), And when the number of times of change is 10, 20, or 30, the change pattern type is associated with a change pattern type of special battle change (code “06H”).

  In addition, in the case where the result is a failure, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440, the gaming state is shortened (the uncertain change state and the shortened state). ), And when the number of times of fluctuation is other than the 10th, 20th, and 30th times, the fluctuation pattern type is referred to as normal fluctuation (code “04H”) and out-of-balance battle fluctuation (code “05H”). Two types of variation pattern are associated with each other. Any one of these variation pattern types is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, these variation pattern types are set to be easily selected in the order of code “04H” and code “05H”.

  In addition, if the result is a failure, the game state is reduced to a short time (non-probable change state and short time) regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the first start port 32 or the second start port 3440. State), and when the number of changes is the 10th, 20th, and 30th times, a change pattern type of special battle change (code “06H”) is associated as the change pattern type.

  In addition, when the result is a failure, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 3440, the gaming state falls (it is determined to fall in the probability variation state). In the case of (winning state), a variation pattern type of special battle variation (code “06H”) is associated as the variation pattern type.

  In addition, when the winning / winning is a win (big win), the lottery result of the special symbol is triggered by the winning of the first start port 32, and the gaming state is normal (non-probability change state and non-short-time state). In this case, as the variation pattern types, two types of variation pattern types, that is, per normal variation (code “07H”) and per pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 (code “08H”) are associated with each other. Any one of these variation pattern types is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, these variation pattern types are set to be easily selected in the order of code “08H” and code “07H”.

  In addition, when the winning / failing is a win, the lottery result of the special symbol is triggered by the winning of the first start port 32, and the gaming state is a short time (probability change state and short time state), a short time (non-probability change state) If the number of fluctuations is other than the 10, 20, 30, 31st, etc., it is a win pattern battle as the variation pattern type. A variation pattern type of variation (code “09H”) is associated.

  In addition, in the case where the winning / failing is a win, the lottery result of the special symbol is triggered by the winning of the first start port 32, and the gaming state is a short time (probability variation state and short time state), a short time (non-probability variation state) And a short time state) or a fall (a state in which the fall judgment is won in the probability variation state), and when the number of fluctuations is 10, 20, 30, 31 or more, a special battle fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern type A variation pattern type of hit (code “0AH”) is associated.

  In addition, when the winning / winning is a win (big hit), the special symbol lottery result is triggered by the winning of the second start port 3440, and the gaming state is normal (non-probability change state and non-short-time state). In this case, as the variation pattern types, two variation pattern types, that is, per normal variation (code “07H”) and pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 (code “08H”) are associated with each other. Any one of these variation pattern types is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, these variation pattern types are set to be easily selected in the order of code “08H” and code “07H”.

  In addition, when the winner is a win, the lottery result of the special symbol is triggered by the winning of the second start port 3440, and the gaming state is a short time (probability change state and short time state), a short time (non-probability change state) If the number of fluctuations is other than the 10, 20, 30, 31st, etc., it is a win pattern battle as the variation pattern type. A variation pattern type of variation (code “09H”) is associated.

  In addition, when the winner is a win, the lottery result of the special symbol is triggered by the winning of the second start port 3440, and the gaming state is a short time (probability change state and short time state), a short time (non-probability change state) And a short time state) or a fall (a state in which the fall judgment is won in the probability variation state), and when the number of fluctuations is 10, 20, 30, 31 or more, a special battle fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern type A variation pattern type of hit (code “0AH”) is associated.

  In this way, in the variation pattern determination table, the final variation pattern (the pattern of the first half and the pattern of the second half) is associated with the variation pattern type selected based on the big hit / no-go, special figure type, state, and number of fluctuations. It has been.

  More specifically, when the variation pattern type is normal variation (code “00H”), as the variation pattern, the first half pattern “00H” and the second half patterns “00H” to “01H” Are associated. Note that one type of pattern is selected for the latter half pattern by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the latter half is set so that it can be easily selected in the order of the pattern “00H” and the pattern “01H”.

  When the variation pattern type is pseudo 1 to pseudo 2 normal reach (code “01H”), the variation patterns include the first half pattern “01H” to “02H”, the second half pattern “02H”, Are associated. As for the pattern of the first half, one type of pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “01H” and the pattern “02H”.

  When the variation pattern type is pseudo 1 to pseudo 2SP (code “02H”), the variation patterns include the first half pattern “01H” to “02H” and the second half pattern “03H”. It is associated. As for the pattern of the first half, one type of pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “01H” and the pattern “02H”.

  When the variation pattern type is pseudo 3 to pseudo 4SP (code “03H”), the variation patterns include the first half pattern “03H” to “04H” and the second half pattern “03H”. It is associated. As for the pattern of the first half, one type of pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “03H” and the pattern “04H”.

  When the variation pattern type is normal variation (code “04H”), the variation pattern is associated with the pattern “00H” in the first half and the patterns “04H” to “05H” in the second half. ing. Note that one type of pattern is selected for the latter half pattern by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the latter half is set so that it can be easily selected in the order of the pattern “04H” and the pattern “05H”.

  When the variation pattern type is out-of-balance battle variation (code “05H”), the variation patterns include the first half pattern “01H” to “04H” and the second half pattern “06H” to “07H”. Are associated with each other. In addition, as for the pattern of the first half part and the second half part, any one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although not shown in detail, the pattern of the first half is set so that it can be easily selected in the order of pattern “01H”, pattern “02H”, pattern “03H”, and pattern “04H”. The pattern in the latter half is set so that it can be easily selected in the order of the pattern “06H” and the pattern “07H”.

  Further, when the variation pattern type is special battle variation (code “06H”), the first half pattern “01H” to “04H” and the second half pattern “08H” are associated as variation patterns. It has been. As for the pattern of the first half, one type of pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although not shown in detail, the pattern of the first half is set so that it can be easily selected in the order of pattern “01H”, pattern “02H”, pattern “03H”, and pattern “04H”.

  Further, when the variation pattern type is per normal variation (code “07H”), the variation pattern is associated with the pattern “00H” in the first half and the pattern “0CH” in the second half.

  Further, when the variation pattern type is per pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 (code “08H”), as the variation patterns, the patterns “01H” to “04H” in the first half portion and the patterns “09H” to “09H” in the latter half portion are used. 0BH "is associated. In addition, as for the pattern of the first half part and the second half part, any one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “04H”, the pattern “03H”, the pattern “02H”, and the pattern “01H”. The pattern in the latter half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “0BH”, the pattern “0AH”, and the pattern “09H”.

  When the variation pattern type is a hit battle variation (code “09H”), the variation patterns are the first half pattern “01H” to “04H” and the second half pattern “0DH” to “10H”. Are associated with each other. In addition, as for the pattern of the first half part and the second half part, any one pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “04H”, the pattern “03H”, the pattern “02H”, and the pattern “01H”. The pattern of the latter half is set so that the pattern “10H”, the pattern “0FH”, the pattern “0EH”, and the pattern “0DH” are easily selected.

  Also, when the variation pattern type is per special battle variation (code “0AH”), the first half portion patterns “01H” to “04H” and the second half portion pattern “11H” correspond as variation patterns. It is attached. As for the pattern of the first half, one type of pattern is selected by a predetermined lottery. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pattern of the first half is set to be easily selected in the order of the pattern “04H”, the pattern “03H”, the pattern “02H”, and the pattern “01H”.

  Thus, the pattern of the first half part in the variation pattern is divided into patterns “00H” to “04H” as described above. The patterns “00H” to “04H” are associated with the contents of the variation pattern type in the first half and the variation time (ms), respectively.

  More specifically, the variation time 0 ms is associated with the pattern “00H” in the first half. Also, the first half pattern “01H” is associated with pseudo 1 and variation time 11000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type of the first half. The pattern “02H” in the first half is associated with pseudo 2 and the variation time 32000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the first half. Further, the pattern “03H” in the first half is associated with pseudo 3 and the variation time 50000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the first half. The pattern “04H” in the first half is associated with pseudo 4 and the variation time 67000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the first half.

  Further, the latter half of the variation pattern is divided into patterns “00H” to “11H” as described above. The contents of the latter half of the variation pattern type and the variation time (ms) are associated with the patterns “00H” to “11H”, respectively.

  More specifically, the pattern “00H” in the latter half portion is associated with the low-accuracy variation (1) and the variation time of 4000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half portion. In addition, the pattern “01H” in the latter half is associated with the less likely variation (2) and the variation time of 8000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half. Further, the pattern “02H” in the latter half part is associated with the normal reach deviation and the fluctuation time 10000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part. Further, the pattern “03H” in the latter half portion is associated with the difference in SP reach and the variation time 40000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half portion. In addition, the latter half pattern “04H” is associated with the variation (1) of the probability variation time and the variation time 1300 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half. In addition, the pattern “05H” in the latter half portion is associated with the variation (2) of the probability variation time short and the variation time of 3000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half portion. Also, the pattern “06H” in the latter half part is associated with the battle loss 1 of the probability change time and the fluctuation time 40000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part. Also, the pattern “07H” in the latter half part is associated with the battle loss 2 of the probability variation time and the fluctuation time 60000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half part. Also, the pattern “08H” in the latter half portion is associated with a special battle reach deviation with a short time and a variation time of 65000 ms as the contents of the variation pattern type in the latter half portion.

  Also, the pattern “09H” in the latter half is associated with the SP reach and the fluctuation time 75000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half. Also, the pattern “0AH” in the latter half part is associated with the fluctuation time of 183000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part as “SP reach out → SSP reach”. Further, the pattern “0BH” in the latter half part is associated with the fluctuation time of 114000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part as “normal fluctuation → per SSP reach”. Also, the pattern “0CH” in the latter half is associated with the direct hit and the fluctuation time 8000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half. Further, the pattern “0DH” in the latter half part is associated with the battle early stage and the fluctuation time 31000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part. In addition, the pattern “0EH” in the latter half is associated with the middle of the battle as the content of the variation pattern type in the latter half and the fluctuation time of 42000 ms. Further, the pattern “0FH” in the latter half portion is associated with the end of the battle as the content of the variation pattern type in the latter half portion and the variation time 94000 ms. Further, the pattern “10H” in the latter half part is associated with the per-battle inversion and the fluctuation time 110000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part. Further, the pattern “11H” in the latter half part is associated with a special battle reach per hour and a fluctuation time of 66000 ms as the contents of the fluctuation pattern type in the latter half part. Note that these variation patterns are examples, and the variation patterns need not be divided into the first half and the second half. Further, the types of various patterns in the first half and the latter half may be more or less. The reason why the variation pattern is divided into the first half and the second half is that it is possible to have more types with a smaller amount of data than when the variation pattern types are not divided.

  Next, various tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 70 will be described.

[Sub variation pattern determination table]
The sub variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is a table for determining a sub variation pattern number based on the variation pattern type and variation pattern (main variation pattern) determined by the main CPU 61. In the sub variation pattern determination table, a sub variation pattern number is associated with each variation pattern command (code) received by the sub CPU 71 from the main CPU 61.

  More specifically, when the main variation pattern type is “00H” to “03H”, that is, the main variation pattern type is a normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-short-time gaming state), and the result is not correct. In some cases, “1” to “8” are associated as sub variation pattern numbers.

  Further, when the main variation pattern type is “04H” to “06H”, that is, the main variation pattern type is a probability variation / short time gaming state, a non-probability variation / short time gaming state, or a state in which a winning lottery is won (in other words, For example, when the game state is at least a probability variation game state and the answer is not right, “9” to “22” are associated as sub variation pattern numbers.

  In this way, when a battle-type reach effect is performed and the answer is no, “11” to “22” are selected as the sub variation pattern numbers.

  Also, when the main variation pattern type is “07H” to “08H”, that is, when the main variation pattern type is the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-short-time gaming state) and the win / fail is a hit. , “23” to “35” are associated as sub variation pattern numbers.

  In addition, when the main variation pattern type is “09H” to “0AH”, that is, the main variation pattern type is a probability variation / time-short game state, a non-probability variation / time-short game state, or a state in which a winning lottery is won (in other words, For example, if it is at least a probability variation gaming state and the answer is a win, “36” to “55” are associated as sub variation pattern numbers.

  In this way, when a battle-type reach effect is performed and the answer is a win, “36” to “55” are selected as the sub variation pattern numbers.

[Hold Character Determination Table]
The reserved character determination table shown in FIG. 63 is displayed when the character reserved image (held image) is displayed in accordance with the start memory of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time saving gaming state). It is a table for determining the character (holding character) which a reservation image shows. In the reserved character determination table, the reserved character (determined character) determined for each sub variation pattern number determined with reference to the sub variation pattern determination table and a predetermined random number range (“0” to “99”). And lottery value information for determining a determined character based on a lottery value extracted (lottery) from the above.

  As a determined character, first, a normal character, a chance character, or a confirmed character is determined by a predetermined lottery.

  Thus, when the normal character is determined as the determined character, among the normal characters (the reserved character A, the reserved character B, the reserved character C, the reserved character D, the reserved character E, and the reserved character F), the currently reserved character One reserved character that does not overlap with the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the display area 610 and the character display area 600 is randomly determined by a predetermined lottery.

  If a chance character is determined as the determined character, among the chance characters (holding character G and holding character H), the character holding image displayed in the current holding character display area 610 and the character display area 600. One reserved character that does not overlap with the reserved character indicated by is determined at random by a predetermined lottery. When a character hold image indicating the reserved character G and the reserved character H is currently displayed in the reserved character display area 610 or the character display area 600 (that is, both the reserved character G and the reserved character H are displayed). Case), the decision of the chance character is canceled and the normal character is decided as the decided character.

  Further, when a confirmed character (holding character I) is selected as the determined character, and a character holding image indicating the holding character I is currently displayed in the holding character display area 610 or the character display area 600. Is canceled as the determined character (holding character I), and the normal character is determined as the determined character.

  In the reserved character determination table, a number (determined character number) is associated with one determined reserved character. The determined character number is defined as a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the character.

  More specifically, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 1, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 100/100 by lottery, and one of “1A” to “1F” is determined as a determined character number. Is done. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 2, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 100/100 by lottery, and any of “2A” to “2F” is determined as a determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 3, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 100/100 by lottery, and any of “3A” to “3F” is determined as a determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 4, a normal character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 100/100 by lottery, and any of “4A” to “4F” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 5, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 99/100 by lottery, and any one of “5A” to “5F” is determined as a determined character number. The chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 1/100, and any one of “5G” to “5H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 6, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 95/100 by lottery, and any one of “6A” to “6F” is determined as a determined character number. The chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 5/100, and any one of “6G” to “6H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 7, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 90/100 by lottery, and any one of “7A” to “7F” is determined as a determined character number. The chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 10/100, and any one of “7G” to “7H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 8, a normal character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 75/100 by lottery, and any of “8A” to “8F” is determined as the determined character number. A chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 25/100, and any one of “8G” to “8H” is determined as the determined character number.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 23, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 50/100 by lottery, and any one of “23A” to “23F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 30/100, and any one of “23G” to “23H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 Then, “23I” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 24, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 90/100 by lottery, and one of “24A” to “24F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 10/100, and any one of “24G” to “24H” is determined as a determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 25, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 85/100 by lottery, and one of “25A” to “25F” is determined as a determined character number. The chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 15/100, and any one of “25G” to “25H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 26, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 80/100 by lottery, and any one of “26A” to “26F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100, and any one of “26G” to “26H” is determined as a determined character number.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 27, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 90/100 by lottery, and any one of “27A” to “27F” is determined as a determined character number. The chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 10/100, and any one of “27G” to “27H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 28, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 85/100 by lottery, and any one of “28A” to “28F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 15/100, and any one of “28G” to “28H” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 29, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 80/100 by lottery, and any one of “29A” to “29F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100, and any one of “29G” to “29H” is determined as a determined character number.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 30, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 50/100 by lottery, and any one of “30A” to “30F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 30/100, and one of “30G” to “30H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 Then, “30I” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 31, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 50/100 by lottery, and any one of “31A” to “31F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 30/100, and any one of “31G” to “31H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 Then, “31I” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 32, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 50/100 by lottery, and one of “32A” to “32F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 30/100, and any of “32G” to “32H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 Then, “32I” is determined as the determined character number.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 33, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 by lottery, and any one of “33A” to “33F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 75/100, and one of “33G” to “33H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 5/100 Then, “33I” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 34, a normal character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 20/100 by lottery, and any one of “34A” to “34F” is determined as a determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 75/100, and any one of “34G” to “34H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 5/100 Then, “34I” is determined as the determined character number. In the case of the sub variation pattern number 35, a normal character is determined as the determined character with a probability of 20/100 by lottery, and any one of “35A” to “35F” is determined as the determined character number. A chance character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 75/100, and any one of “35G” to “35H” is determined as a determined character number, and a determined character is determined as a determined character with a probability of 5/100 Then, “35I” is determined as the determined character number.

[Status determination table]
The status determination table shown in FIG. 64 shows that when a character hold image (hold image) is displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state), It is a table for determining the status of the reserved character indicated by the image. In the status determination table, values of “HP” (hit points) and “MP” (magic power) are associated with each determined character number determined with reference to the reserved character determination table.

  More specifically, when the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character A (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character A). In the case of “1A”, “2A”, “3A” or “5A”, one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of “HP”. In addition, “0” is determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4A” or “6A”, any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “7A” or “8A”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “23A”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24A”, “25A”, or “26A”, any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “27A”, “28A”, or “29A”, any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “30A”, “31A”, or “32A”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “33A”, “34A”, or “35A”, any one of “500” to “999” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character A (ie, warrior), the larger the “HP” value, It is stipulated that a reach production with a high expectation level is performed. Further, the value of “MP” (with some exceptions) is defined to be “0” regardless of the contents of the reach effect. Further, it is defined that a value larger than “700” as “HP” is displayed only when it is a big hit. Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a warrior, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the value of “HP”, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a warrior, and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, a big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character B (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character B), “1B ”,“ 2B ”,“ 3B ”or“ 5B ”, any one of“ 1 ”to“ 100 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of“ HP ”. Any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4B” or “6B”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “100” to “100” as the value of “MP”. Any one of “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “7B” or “8B”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “200” to “100” as the “MP” value. One of “700” is determined at random. In the case of “23B”, “777” is determined as the value of “HP”, and “777” is determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “24B”, “25B”, or “26B”, the value of “HP” and any one of “1” to “100” are determined at random, and the value of “MP” is “ Any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined. In the case of “27B”, “28B” or “29B”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “MP” is “ Any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “30B”, “31B” or “32B”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “MP” is “ Any one of “200” to “700” is determined at random. In the case of “33B”, “34B” or “35B”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “MP” is “ Any one of “500” to “999” is randomly determined.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character B (that is, the wizard), the larger the value of “MP”, the larger the hit It is stipulated that a reach production with a high expectation level is performed. Further, the value of “HP” (with some exceptions) is defined to be one of “1” to “100” (that is, a very small value) regardless of the contents of the reach effect. ing. In addition, a value larger than “700” as “MP” is defined to be displayed only when it is a big hit. Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a wizard, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the value of “MP”, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a magician and both the values of “HP” and “MP” are “777”, the big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character C (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character C), “1C ”,“ 2C ”,“ 3C ”, or“ 5C ”, one of“ 1 ”to“ 300 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of“ HP ”, and“ “0” is determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4C” or “6C”, any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “7C” or “8C”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “23C”, “777” is determined as the value of “HP”, and “777” is determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “24C”, “25C”, or “26C”, any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “27C”, “28C” or “29C”, any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “30C”, “31C” or “32C”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “33C”, “34C”, or “35C”, any one of “500” to “999” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character C (that is, a warrior), the larger the “HP” value, It is stipulated that a reach production with a high expectation of jackpot is performed. Further, the value of “MP” (with some exceptions) is defined to be “0” regardless of the contents of the reach effect. Further, it is defined that a value larger than “700” as “HP” is displayed only when it is a big hit. In this way, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a warrior, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the value of “HP”, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a warrior, and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, the big hit is notified without various reach effects. So-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character D (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character D), “1D ”,“ 2D ”,“ 3D ”, or“ 5D ”, any one of“ 1 ”to“ 100 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of“ HP ”. Any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4D” or “6D”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “100” to “100” is determined as the value of “MP”. Any one of “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “7D” or “8D”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “200” to “100” as the “MP” value. One of “700” is determined at random. In the case of “23D”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24D”, “25D”, or “26D”, the value of “HP” and any one of “1” to “100” are determined at random, and the value of “MP” is “ Any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined. In the case of “27D”, “28D”, or “29D”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ Any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “30D”, “31D”, or “32D”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “MP” is “ Any one of “200” to “700” is determined at random. In the case of “33D”, “34D”, or “35D”, any one of “1” to “100” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ Any one of “500” to “999” is randomly determined.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-short game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character D (that is, a monk), the larger the value of “MP”, the larger the hit It is stipulated that a reach production with a high expectation level is performed. Further, the value of “HP” (with some exceptions) is defined to be one of “1” to “100” (that is, a very small value) regardless of the contents of the reach effect. ing. In addition, a value larger than “700” as “MP” is defined to be displayed only when it is a big hit. Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a monk, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the value of “MP”, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a priest and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, the big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character E (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character E), “1E ”,“ 2E ”,“ 3E ”or“ 5E ”, any one of“ 300 ”to“ 900 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of“ HP ”. Any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4E” or “6E”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “100” to “MP” is determined as the “MP” value. Any one of “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “7E” or “8E”, any one of “300” to “500” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “300” to “MP” as the value of “MP”. Any one of “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “23E”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24E”, “25E”, or “26E”, the value of “HP” and any one of “200” to “700” are determined at random, and the value of “MP” is “ Any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “27E”, “28E”, or “29E”, any one of “200” to “700” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ Any one of “100” to “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “30E”, “31E”, or “32E”, any one of “300” to “500” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ Any one of “300” to “500” is randomly determined. In the case of “33E”, “34E”, or “35E”, any one of “800” to “900” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “MP” is “ Any one of “800” to “900” is randomly determined.

  In this way, when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character E (that is, a knight) in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time-short game state), the values of “HP” and “MP” are It is stipulated that the closer it is, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot will be.

  For example, in the case of the determined character number 3E (pseudo 1 loss), “HP” is determined from a range of values “300” to “900”, while “MP” is (from “300” to “HP”). It is determined from the value range of “0” to “300” (different from the value range of “900”). On the other hand, in the case of the determined character number 33E (per pseudo 4), “HP” is determined from a range of values “800” to “900”, while “MP” is (“HP” “ It is determined from the range of values “800” to “900” (same as the range of values “800” to “900”).

  According to such range setting of the values of “HP” and “MP”, the difference between the values of “HP” and “MP” in the pseudo 1 (the difference in the values of the pseudo 1) and the “HP” in the pseudo 4 ”And“ MP ”are compared with each other (pseudo 4 value difference), the pseudo 4 value difference tends to be smaller than the pseudo 1 value difference. That is, in other words, the difference between the values of “HP” and “MP” when a reach effect with a high expectation level of jackpot is performed is “HP” and “HP” when a reach effect with a low expectation level of jackpot is performed. It tends to be smaller than the difference between the values of “MP”.

  Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a knight, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the difference between the values of “HP” and “MP” (the closeness of each other). , Can increase the interest of the player.

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a knight and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, a big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character F (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character F), “1F ”,“ 2F ”,“ 3F ”or“ 5F ”, any one of“ 50 ”to“ 500 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as the value of“ HP ”. “0” is determined as the value of “MP”. In the case of “4F” or “6F”, any one of “30” to “400” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “7F” or “8F”, any one of “1” to “250” is randomly determined as the “HP” value, and “0” is determined as the “MP” value. Is done. In the case of “23F”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24F”, “25F”, or “26F”, any one of “1” to “500” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. Further, in the case of “27F”, “28F” or “29F”, any one of “1” to “400” is randomly determined as the value of “HP” and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “30F”, “31F”, or “32F”, any one of “1” to “300” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined. In the case of “33F”, “34F”, or “35F”, any one of “1” to “200” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “MP” is “ 0 "is determined.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-short-time game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character F (ie, zombie), the smaller the value of “HP”, the larger the hit It is stipulated that a reach production with a high expectation level is performed. Further, the value of “MP” (with some exceptions) is defined to be “0” regardless of the contents of the reach effect. Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a zombie, the expectation degree of jackpot can be suggested based on the value of “HP”, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a zombie and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, a big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character G (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character G), “1G ”To“ 8G ”, any one of“ 100 ”to“ 899 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as a value of“ HP ”, and“ 100 ”is a value of“ MP ”. Any one of “899” is randomly determined. In the case of “23G”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24G” to “35G”, any one of “1” to “999” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “1” to “ Any one of “999” is determined at random.

  Thus, in the normal game state (non-probability / non-time-short game state), when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character G (that is, a sage), the values of “HP” and “MP” are It is defined that the larger the size is, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot is. In addition, the reserved character G is set so that it is difficult to select the reserved character G when it is off. That is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a sage, it can be suggested that the player is likely to be a big hit regardless of the values of “HP” and “MP”. Can enhance the interest of

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a sage and the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, the big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character H (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character H), “1H ”To“ 8H ”, any one of“ 100 ”to“ 899 ”is randomly determined (by a predetermined lottery) as a value of“ HP ”, and“ 100 ”is a value of“ MP ”. Any one of “899” is randomly determined. In the case of “23H”, “777” is determined as the “HP” value, and “777” is determined as the “MP” value. In the case of “24H” to “35H”, any one of “1” to “999” is randomly determined as the value of “HP”, and “1” to “ Any one of “999” is determined at random.

  In this way, when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character H (that is, the hero) in the normal game state (non-probability / non-time-short game state), the values of “HP” and “MP” are It is defined that the larger the size is, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot is. Further, the reserved character H is set so that it is difficult to select the reserved character H when it is off. That is, if the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a hero, it can be suggested that the player is likely to be a big hit regardless of the values of “HP” and “MP”. Can enhance the interest of

  Further, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a hero and both the values of “HP” and “MP” are “777”, a big hit is notified without various reach effects. It is a so-called direct hit. In this way, when the values of “HP” and “MP” are both “777”, an effect having a rarity is performed, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  When the determined character number is a combination of the value of the sub variation pattern number and the name of the reserved character I (that is, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character I), “23I ”To“ 35I ”,“ 777 ”is determined as the value of“ HP ”, and“ 777 ”is determined as the value of“ MP ”. That is, in other words, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is the reserved character I, “777” is always determined as the values of “HP” and “MP”.

  In this way, when the reserved character indicated by the character hold image is the hold character I (that is, God) in the normal game state (non-probability / non-time-short game state), the values of “HP” and “MP” are Both are “777”, which is a big hit. Thus, when the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image is a god, it can be suggested that the big hit has been confirmed, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  It should be noted that, when the determined character number is any number, if it is out of place, the value of “HP” becomes a rough line (for example, “111”, etc.) or the same as the value of “MP” If it becomes, the lottery is performed again to newly determine the value of “HP”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being spoiled by being out of play despite giving a big hit expectation. In the case of a big hit, if the value of “HP” becomes rough (unlike the case of loss), the value as it is is determined as “HP”.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, for each character indicated by the character hold image (hold image), the “HP” determined based on the characteristics of the character (profession and the type of the character itself). ”And“ MP ”have different tendencies, and the conditions indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot are different (for example, in the case of a warrior, the higher the value of“ HP ”, the higher the expectation of jackpot, If you are a wizard, the greater the value of “MP”, the higher the expectation of jackpots). In this way, based on which character is displayed as the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image, the effect can be displayed in various ways, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[Level decision table / Level-up production]
FIG. 65 to FIG. 67 show the level determination table on the left side of the paper and the example of effects performed based on the items determined with reference to the level determination table on the right side of the paper. The level determination table is a table for determining an effect stage number and a final level in a level-up effect performed with a pseudo-ream. The production stage number defines the mode background and the order in which the mode backgrounds 1 to 5 are displayed together with the pseudo-ream. The final level is a level that is finally displayed when the level of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image increases. The level of the reserved character is displayed on the level display unit 2100 of the liquid crystal display device 4. The state in which the level of the reserved character increases is displayed as the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 of the liquid crystal display device 4 increases.

  The level-up effect is indicated by the character hold image when the character hold image (hold image) is displayed according to the start memory of the first special symbol in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-time saving game state). This is an effect of raising the level of the reserved character at a predetermined timing (an effect of raising the level of the reserved character). The level-up effect is performed with the pseudo-ream as described above. Moreover, the predetermined timing which raises a level is set according to the transition of the mode backgrounds 1-5 displayed when the production mode is the normal mode.

  There are nine predetermined timings for raising the level. Specifically, as a predetermined timing for raising the level, while mode background 1 (normally 1 (town)) is displayed (mode background 1 is being executed) and from mode background 1 to mode background 2 (normally 2 (outside) )) During transition (when mode background 1 to 2 is transitioned), while mode background 2 is being displayed (mode background 2 is being executed), and from mode background 2 to mode background 3 (normal 3 (dungeon 1F)) During transition (during transition from mode background 2 to 3), while mode background 3 is displayed (during execution of mode background 3), and during transition from mode background 3 to mode background 4 (normally 4 (dungeon 2F)) Mode background 3 to 4), while mode background 4 is being displayed (mode background 4 is being executed), while mode background 4 is being transferred to mode background 5 (when mode background 4 to 5 is being transferred), Background 5 (Normal 5 And between (mode background 5 running) the boss)) is displayed, it is provided.

  With regard to the specific mode (how to raise the timing and level) at these nine timings in total, the stage stage number determined with reference to the level determination table and the character hold image Is determined according to the growth type (balance type, middle board type, second half type, special type or deterministic type) of the reserved character indicated by.

  In the level determination table, for each sub variation pattern number determined with reference to the sub variation pattern determination table, extraction is performed from the production stage number and the final level and a predetermined random number range (“0” to “99”). ) And lottery value information for determining the stage number and final level based on the lottery value. Thus, by referring to the level determination table, the stage stage number and the final level of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image are determined.

  Specifically, in the case of sub variation pattern number 1 (normal variation), the mode background 1 is determined as the production stage with a probability of 99/100, and any one of “1” to “10” is predetermined as the final level. Randomly determined by lottery. Further, with a probability of 1/100, the mode background 5 is determined as the production stage, and “1” is determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of sub variation pattern number 2 (normal variation), mode background 1 is determined as the stage with a probability of 99/100, and any one of “1” to “10” is randomly determined as the final level. The Further, with a probability of 1/100, the mode background 5 is determined as the production stage, and “1” is determined as the final level.

  In addition, in the case of sub variation pattern number 3 (pseudo 1 normal loss), the mode backgrounds 1 and 2 (note that the order of numerical values (specifically, 1 and 2 are , Indicating the order in which the mode background shifts (the same applies hereinafter)), and any one of “20” to “39” is randomly determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 4 (pseudo 2 normal loss), mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined as production stages with a probability of 100/100, and any of “40” to “59” is selected as the final level. Is randomly determined.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 5 (pseudo 1SP loss), the mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 90/100, and any one of “20” to “39” is random as the final level. To be determined. Further, the mode backgrounds 2 and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 10/100, and any one of “40” to “59” is randomly determined as the final level.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 6 (pseudo 2SP loss), the mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 80/100, and the final level is any one of “40” to “59”. Is determined randomly. Further, the mode backgrounds 2, 3, and 4 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 20/100, and any one of “60” to “79” is randomly determined as the final level.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 7 (pseudo 3SP loss), the mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 50/100, and the final levels of “60” to “79” are determined. Any one is determined at random. In addition, with the probability of 50/100, mode backgrounds 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as production stages, and any one of “80” to “98” is randomly determined as the final level. If “77” is determined (winning) as the final level, a lottery is performed again to determine a new final level. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost due to a loss even though the final level is a numerical value that suggests a big hit and gives a sense of expectation of the big hit.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 8 (pseudo 4SP loss), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as production stages with a probability of 100/100, and “80” to “98” are the final levels. "Is randomly determined. If “77” is determined (winning) as the final level, a lottery is performed again to determine a new final level. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost due to a loss even though the final level is a numerical value that suggests a big hit and gives a sense of expectation of the big hit.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 23 (direct hit), the mode background 5 is determined as the effect stage with the probability of 80/100, and “1” is determined as the final level. Further, with the probability of 10/100, the mode background 5 is determined as the effect stage, and “77” is determined as the final level. Further, with a probability of 10/100, the mode background 5 is determined as the effect stage, and “99” is determined as the final level.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 24 (per pseudo 1SP), the mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 90/100, and any one of “20” to “49” is random as the final level. To be determined. Further, the mode backgrounds 2 and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 10/100, and any one of “40” to “69” is randomly determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of sub variation pattern number 25 (per pseudo 1SP loss SSP), mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined as stage effects with a probability of 85/100, and any one of “20” to “49” is set as the final level. Is determined randomly. Further, the mode backgrounds 2 and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 15/100, and any one of “40” to “69” is randomly determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of sub variation pattern number 26 (per pseudo 1 normal SSP), mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined as production stages with a probability of 80/100, and any one of “20” to “49” is set as the final level. Is determined randomly. Further, the mode backgrounds 2 and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 20/100, and any one of “40” to “69” is randomly determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 27 (per pseudo 2SP), the mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 90/100, and any one of “40” to “69” is determined as the final level. Is determined randomly. Also, with the probability of 10/100, mode backgrounds 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages, and any one of “60” to “89” is randomly determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 28 (per pseudo 2SP loss SSP), the mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 85/100, and the final levels of “40” to “69” are determined. Any one is determined at random. In addition, with the probability of 15/100, mode backgrounds 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages, and any one of “60” to “89” is randomly determined as the final level.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 29 (per pseudo-2 normal SSP), the mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 80/100, and the final levels of “40” to “69” are determined. Any one is determined at random. Further, the mode backgrounds 2, 3, and 4 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 20/100, and any one of “60” to “89” is randomly determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 30 (per pseudo-3SP), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 50/100, and the final levels of “60” to “89” are determined. Any one is determined at random. Further, mode backgrounds 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 49/100, and any one of “80” to “98” is randomly determined as the final level. Further, mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 1/100, and “77” is determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 31 (per pseudo 3SP loss SSP), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 50/100, and “60” to “89” as final levels. "Is randomly determined. Further, mode backgrounds 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 49/100, and any one of “80” to “98” is randomly determined as the final level. Further, mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 1/100, and “77” is determined as the final level.

  Further, in the case of sub variation pattern number 32 (per pseudo-3 normal SSP), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 50/100, and “60” to “79” as final levels. "Is randomly determined. Further, mode backgrounds 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 49/100, and any one of “80” to “98” is randomly determined as the final level. Further, mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as production stages with a probability of 1/100, and “77” is determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 33 (per pseudo 4SP), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as production stages with a probability of 99/100, and the final levels are “80” to “99”. "Is randomly determined. Further, mode backgrounds 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 1/100, and “99” is determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 34 (per pseudo 4SP loss SSP), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as production stages with a probability of 99/100, and the final level is “80” to Any one of “99” is determined at random. Further, mode backgrounds 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 1/100, and “99” is determined as the final level.

  In the case of sub variation pattern number 35 (per pseudo 4 normal), mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined as production stages with a probability of 99/100, and the final levels are “80” to “80”. Any one of “99” is randomly determined. Further, mode backgrounds 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 are determined as the production stage with a probability of 1/100, and “99” is determined as the final level.

  Thus, when the stage stage number of the reserved character is determined, the specific timing (more specifically, the specific mode background for raising the level and the total number of times for raising the level) is determined.

  For example, when the mode background 1 is determined as the production stage, it is determined to increase the level during the execution of the mode background 1 (that is, only once). In addition, when the mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined, the level may be increased during the execution of the mode background 1, during the transition from mode 1 to 2, and during the execution of the mode background 2 (that is, a total of 3 times). It is determined. When mode backgrounds 1, 2, and 3 are determined, mode background 1 is being executed, mode 1 is being shifted to 2, mode background 2 is being executed, mode 2 is being shifted to 3 and mode background 3 is being determined. It is decided to raise the level during execution (ie, a total of 5 times). When the mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined, the mode background 1 is being executed, the mode 1 is being shifted to 2, the mode background 2 is being executed, and the mode 2 is being shifted to 3; It is determined to increase the level during execution of the background 3, when the mode 3 is shifted from the mode 3, and during the execution of the mode background 4 (that is, a total of 7 times). When mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are determined, mode background 1 is being executed, mode 1 is being shifted to 2, mode background 2 being being executed, and mode 2 is being shifted to 3 The level is increased (ie, a total of 9 times) when mode background 3 is being executed, when mode 3 is shifted to 4 and when mode background 4 is being executed, when mode 4 is being shifted to 5 and when mode background 5 is being executed. It is decided. Thus, when the stage number is determined, the level is raised while the determined mode background is being executed and during the transition of the mode background. It should be noted that the level may not necessarily be raised at every level raising timing. For example, when mode backgrounds 1 and 2 are determined, the effect of whether the level rises or does not rise is displayed during execution of mode background 1, and the result that the level does not rise is displayed. 2 may be raised during execution, and the level may be raised twice in total. If the finally determined final level is displayed, the timing of the level increase can be designed as appropriate.

  As described above, when the stage stage number of the reserved character is determined, the specific mode background for increasing the level of the reserved character and the total number of times of increasing the level are determined.

  Further, when the specific mode background for raising the level of the reserved character and the total number of times of raising the level are determined, the specific level raising method is determined by the growth type of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image (balance type, middle board type). , Second half type, special type or deterministic type). Information about the growth type of the reserved character is set in advance for each reserved character determined with reference to the reserved character determination table. Specifically, the growth type of the reserved character A (warrior) and the reserved character D (priest) is set as a balance type. Further, the growth type of the reserved character B (the wizard) and the reserved character E (knight) is set as the middle type. Moreover, the growth type of the reserved character C (warrior) and the reserved character F (zombie) is set as the latter half type. Further, the growth type of the reserved character G (sage) and the reserved character H (hero) is set as a special type. Further, the reserved character I (God) has a growth type set as a definite type.

  In the following, a specific method of raising the level of the reserved character according to the growth type will be described by taking up the case of the sub variation pattern number 26 in the effect examples shown on the right side of FIGS. 65 to 67. In this case, it is assumed that mode backgrounds 1 and 2 (that is, the total number of times of raising the level is 3) are determined as the production stage and “48” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery.

  In this example, when a balance type holding character (holding character A or holding character D) is determined as the growth type, as a specific method of raising the level, mode background 1 is being executed and modes 1 to 2 are being executed. The level is increased on average over a total of three times at the time of transition and during the execution of mode background 2 to reach the final level “48”. That is, the numerical value 16 obtained by dividing the numerical value 48 of the final level by the numerical value 3 of the total number of times of raising the level is the level to be raised at one timing. As a result, in this example, the level is increased to “16” during execution of mode 1 and further increased to “32” when shifting from mode 1 to mode 2, and further increased to “32” during execution of mode background 2. 48 "(ie, the final level).

  In the above example, the numerical value of the level to be increased per time is the same at a total of three times, but may be different. That is, the balance-type reserved character as the growth type may be set so that the level rises on average at a predetermined number of times.

  Next, when the middle-type reserved character (holding character B and holding character E) is determined as the growth type, as a specific way to raise the level, mode background 1 is being executed and when mode 1 is shifted to 2 Then, the mode is raised in the middle of the timing of mode background 2 being executed a total of three times to reach the final level “48”. That is, the level rises to “48” (that is, the final level) at the second timing (during the transition from mode 1 to 2) out of the total three times.

  In the above example, the level is increased only by the second timing (midboard timing) at the total timing of three times, but may be slightly increased at the first or third timing. .

  Next, when the second half type of reserved characters (holding character C and holding character F) are determined as the growth type, as a specific way to raise the level, mode background 1 is being executed and when mode 1 is shifted to 2 Then, the level is raised in the latter half of the total three times of the mode background 2 being executed to reach the final level “48”. That is, the level rises to “48” (that is, the final level) at the third timing (during execution of mode background 2) out of the total three times.

  In the above example, the level is increased only by the third timing (second half timing) in the total of three timings. However, the level may be slightly increased by the first timing or the second timing. .

  In the case where a special type of reserved character (holding character G and holding character H) is determined as the growth type, in this embodiment, the specific level raising method is the same as that of the balance type reserved character. It has become. Note that when a special type of reserved character is determined, the expectation level for the big hit is set high regardless of the numerical value of the level. In this way, there is no particular limitation on how to raise the level of the special-type reserved character.

  Next, among the reserved characters corresponding to the growth type, the sub variation pattern number in the production examples shown on the right side of FIGS. The case of 31 is taken up and explained. In this case, it is assumed that mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as the production stage and “77” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery.

  In this example, as a specific method for raising the level, the final level “77” is displayed over all timings at which the level can be raised. In this way, it is possible to notify that the big hit has been confirmed, and as a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced. In this way, when the level is displayed as “77”, there is a possibility that the player recognizes that it is a big hit. Therefore, in the other reserved characters other than the fixed-type reserved character, it is set so that the numerical value such as the level “77” is not displayed in the case other than the big hit.

  Next, regarding the specific level raising method of the reserved character when the boss battle effect is suddenly performed as the effect, among the effect examples shown on the right side of the paper in FIGS. 65 to 67, the sub variation pattern number 1 and the sub variation The case of pattern number 23 will be taken up and described. In the sub variation pattern number 1, it is assumed that the mode background 5 is determined as the effect stage and “1” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery. Further, in the sub variation pattern number 23, it is assumed that the mode background 5 is determined as the effect stage and “1” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery.

  In such a case, both the sub variation pattern number 1 and the sub variation pattern number 23 display only the mode background 5 as an effect stage, and a boss battle effect is performed as a reach effect. Further, both the sub variation pattern number 1 and the sub variation pattern number 23 remain at the level “1”. As described above, the sub variation pattern number 1 and the sub variation pattern number 23 have the same effect contents, but differ depending on whether they are lost or a big hit. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is a big hit until the boss battle effect ends, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

  Next, a specific method of raising the level in the case of the sub variation pattern number 31 in the production examples shown on the right side of the drawing in FIGS. 65 to 67 will be described. In this case, it is assumed that mode backgrounds 1, 2, 3, and 4 are determined as the production stage and “77” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery.

  In this example, as a specific method for raising the level, the final level “77” is displayed over all timings at which the level can be raised. In this way, it is possible to notify that the big hit has been confirmed, and as a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced. In this way, when the level is displayed as “77”, there is a possibility that the player recognizes that it is a big hit. Therefore, in the other reserved characters other than the fixed-type reserved character, it is set so that the numerical value such as the level “77” is not displayed in the case other than the big hit.

  Next, a specific method of raising the level in the case of the sub variation pattern number 35 in the production examples shown on the right side of the drawing in FIGS. 65 to 67 will be described. In this case, it is assumed that mode backgrounds 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 are determined as the production stage and “99” is determined as the final level by a predetermined lottery.

  In this example, as a specific method of raising the level, the final level “99” is displayed over all timings at which the level can be raised. In this way, it can be notified that the big hit has been confirmed. Also, the order of mode background transition is the reverse of the normal order. In this way, when the big hit is fixed, the effect with rarity is performed, so that the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the level determination table, the mode background is used regardless of the type of the sub variation pattern number (except for some exceptions in which the final level is “77”, “99”, etc.). While 4 is displayed (during mode background 4 execution), the level is “60” or higher. Further, while the mode background 5 (normal 5 (normal boss)) is displayed (during execution of the mode background 5), the level is “80” or higher.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a balance-type reserved character is selected as the growth type, it is defined that the mode background does not shift unless a predetermined level set in advance is reached. Specifically, when transitioning to mode background 2, the level needs to be “20” or higher at the time of transition from mode background 1 to 2. Further, when shifting to the mode background 3, the level needs to be “40” or more at the time of shifting from the mode background 2 to 3. Further, when shifting to the mode background 4, the level needs to be “60” or more at the time of shifting from the mode background 3 to 4. Further, when shifting to the mode background 5, the level needs to be “80” or more at the time of shifting from the mode background 4 to 5.

  Here, FIGS. 68A and 68B show display examples of level-up effects. In FIG. 68A, it is assumed that the pseudo-ream starts from the mode background 1 (normally 1 (town)). Further, it is assumed that a character hold image indicating the reserved character A is displayed in the character display area 600, and the reserved character A appears in the display area 4A. Further, it is assumed that the current level of the reserved character A is “10”. As described above, the growth type of the reserved character A is set to the balance type.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the name of the current mode background (“normal 1 (town)”) is displayed in the display area 4A, and a message (mission) of “Lv20 or higher stage promotion!” Is displayed. Thus, since the current level is “10”, when the level is increased to “20” or more, the mode background can be changed from the current normal 1 (town) to the next normal 2 (outside) ( The player is informed that the stage will be promoted).

  In the present embodiment, the reserved character can increase the level by various methods and timings. For example, one way to raise the level includes destroying enemy characters. In other words, the reserved character can raise the level by acquiring an experience value when it is defeated by performing a battle with an enemy character. In the display example shown in FIG. 68 (a), the reserved character A acquires an experience value by defeating an enemy character. In this way, the level of the reserved character is counted up by the experience value acquired by defeating the enemy character.

  In this way, in the display example shown in FIG. 68A, the reserved character A acquires the experience value by destroying the enemy character. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68B, the level of the reserved character A increases from “10” to “20”. That is, the reserved character A has achieved the mission of “Lv. 20 or higher stage promotion!”. Thus, when the reserved character A achieves the mission, an image (effect) related to level-up is displayed, for example, a flame image is displayed in the background of the reserved character A. Further, the message “Lv20 breakthrough!” Is displayed on the background image of the reserved character A, and the mode background of the reserved character A is normally shifted to 2 (outside) (stage shift). If the level of the reserved character A does not reach “20”, the stage shift is not performed, and the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Medium boss battle pre-decision decision table / Medium boss battle pre-decision production]
FIG. 69 shows a middle boss battle first effect determination table for determining the contents of the middle boss battle first effect when the middle boss battle first effect is performed.

  The medium boss battle first-run effect is when the final mode background shifted by the quasi-ream is the mode background 4 (the final arrival background is normally 4 (dungeon 2F)) in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short-time gaming state). Reach production performed in Specifically, the middle boss battle first effect is an effect in which a first character attack is performed on the middle boss when an effect (middle boss battle production) in which a reserved character battles with an enemy character (middle boss) is started. is there. In this way, in the middle boss battle first production, when the first strike of the reserved character is successful, the enemy character (middle boss) is shown to be damaged. That is, it is possible to give the player the impression that the enemy character (middle boss) can be defeated in a short time (impression that the reserved character wins the enemy character (middle boss)), and thus the expectation of the big hit can be increased.

  As described above, in the middle boss battle first effect, an image in which the reserved character sets a first attack on the enemy character is displayed in the display area 4A. Then, the expected degree of jackpot is notified in accordance with the degree of damage (type of damage) that this first strike gives to the enemy character. Specifically, “no damage”, “small damage”, “during damage”, “large damage”, and “defeat” are set as the degree of damage. These are in order of increasing damage, from no damage to low damage, low damage, medium damage, high damage, and defeat. The higher the damage level, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Defeat means that the enemy character has been won by the first strike, that is, that the big hit has been confirmed.

  Note that, in the middle boss battle first production, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is selected as the reserved character performing a battle with the enemy character (middle boss). If a character hold image is displayed not only in the character display area 600 but also in the hold character display area 610, not only the hold character indicated by the character hold image displayed in the character display area 600 but also the hold character is displayed. The reserved character indicated by the character reservation image displayed in the character display area 610 is also selected. That is, one or a plurality of reserved characters are selected as the reserved characters for battle with the enemy character (medium boss) based on the character reserved images displayed in the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610.

  In the middle boss battle pre-empty effect determination table, the damage type (degree of damage) determined for each level of execution of the mode background 4 (runtime level) and a predetermined random number in each of the success / failure (losing or big hit) The lottery value information for determining the damage type based on the lottery value extracted (lottery) from the range (“0” to “99”) is defined.

  More specifically, if the result is a loss and the run-time level is “60” to “64”, no damage is determined as a damage type with a probability of 50/100, and damage is determined with a probability of 45/100. Small damage is determined as the type, and damage is determined as the damage type with a probability of 5/100.

  In addition, when the result is lost and the run-time level is “65” to “69”, small damage is determined as the damage type with a probability of 50/100, and damage is being processed as the damage type with a probability of 45/100. Is determined, and the damage size is determined as the damage type with a probability of 5/100.

  In addition, when the result is “losing” and the run-time level is “70” to “74”, the damage type is determined as the damage type with a probability of 50/100, and the damage type is determined as the damage type with a probability of 50/100. Is determined.

  In addition, when the result is lost and the run-time level is “75” to “79”, the damage size is determined as the damage type with a probability of 100/100.

  Also, if the hit is a big hit and the run-time level is “60” to “64”, no damage is determined as the damage type with a probability of 30/100, and small damage as the damage type with a probability of 45/100. Is determined, and damage is determined as a damage type with a probability of 25/100.

  Also, if the hit is a big hit and the run-time level is “65” to “69”, small damage is determined as a damage type with a probability of 30/100, and damage is being processed as a damage type with a probability of 45/100 Is determined, and the damage amount is determined as the damage type with a probability of 25/100.

  Also, if the success / failure is a big hit and the run-time level is “70” to “74”, the damage type is determined as the damage type with a probability of 50/100, and the damage type is determined as the damage type with a probability of 45/100. Is determined, and destruction is determined as a damage type with a probability of 5/100.

  Also, if the success / failure is a big hit and the run-time level is “75” to “79”, the damage size is determined as the damage type with a probability of 90/100, and the damage type is destroyed with the probability of 10/100. It is determined.

  Also, if the hit is a big hit and the run-time level is “80” to “89”, the damage type is determined as the damage type with a probability of 50/100, and the damage type is destroyed with the probability of 50/100. It is determined.

  In this way, in the middle boss battle first-run effect, if the success or failure is larger than the losing, the enemy character (medium boss) can be damaged greatly. Also, the higher the execution level, the more damage can be done to the enemy character (medium boss). In this way, in the middle boss battle first-run effect, the expectation degree of the big hit can be notified according to the degree of damage to the enemy character by the first-run attack of the reserved character, and as a result, the player's interest can be enhanced.

[Arrangement lottery table / normal boss battle production]
70 and 71 show display examples of a large boss battle effect at normal times. 71 and 72 show an arrangement lottery table for determining the contents of the effect of the large boss battle effect when the large boss battle effect is performed in the normal state.

  The normal big boss battle effect is the mode background 5 (the final reached background is usually 5 (normal boss)) in the normal game state (non-probability change / non-short-time game state). It is a reach production performed in some cases. Specifically, the normal large boss battle effect is an effect in which a reserved character battles with an enemy character (large boss). In a large boss battle production during normal times, the reserved character attacks the enemy character with a special attack. Thus, when the holding character wins the enemy character, a big hit is notified.

  In the normal large boss battle effect, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is selected as the reserved character to battle with the enemy character (large boss). When a character hold image is displayed not only in the character display area 600 but also in the hold character display area 610, the hold character indicated by the character hold image displayed in the hold character display area 610 is simultaneously selected. There is a case. In other words, in the normal large boss battle effect, one or more reserved characters (party) are selected based on the character reserved images displayed in the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610. As described above, in the party, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is a leader.

  In a normal large boss battle effect, one or more reserved characters make one or more attacks (small attacks) against an enemy character (large boss) and are finally displayed in the character display area 600. The reserved character (leader) indicated by the character reserved image performs an attack (major attack) using a special technique. Thus, when the enemy character is won by an attack using the leader's special technique, the big hit is confirmed (the big hit is notified). If the enemy character is not won by an attack using the leader's special technique (when the enemy character is defeated), the losing is confirmed (the losing is notified). In addition, you may make it provide the aspect which revives after a defeat and alert | reports a jackpot.

  In the display example of the normal large boss battle effect shown in FIG. 70, the reserved character A (warrior) and the reserved character B (magician) are displayed as the reserved characters for battle with the enemy character (large boss). In this display example, the reserved character A (warrior) is a reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600. The reserved character B (the wizard) is a reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610. It should be noted that the character hold image displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 is reduced in size so as not to disturb the effect when the large boss battle effect is started (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 70, when the large boss battle effect at the normal time is started, the technique selection list is displayed in the area BP1 at the lower right of the display area 4A. The technique selection list is a list for selecting a deadly technique to be performed last by the leader (in this display example, the holding character A). In the technique selection list, a horizontally long rectangular frame is divided into six sections, and names of techniques that may be selected are described in each section. Thus, one of the techniques described in each section is selected as the final major attack technique. Specifically, for example, one of the six sections blinks, and the blinking state sequentially shifts the six sections counterclockwise. Thereafter, when the player operates the push-down operation button 9A, the transition of the blinking state is stopped, and the technique described in the stopped section is selected as the final killing technique to be performed.

  There are a number of types of tricks based on the ease of victory. In the display example, rank A technique, rank B technique, and rank C technique are displayed in the technique selection list in the order of easiness of winning as major attack techniques. What kind of technique is displayed in the technique selection list is determined based on the level of the reserved character. Specifically, a technique in which the winning character is higher is more easily selected because it is easier to select. In the technique selection list, the same technique may be displayed in different sections among the six sections. Thus, when the same technique is displayed in many of the six sections, it is possible to give the player an impression that this technique is likely to be selected as the last deadly technique (and thus an impression with high expectation of jackpot). .

  In addition, a face image of a reserved character (leader) who performs an attack using a special move last is displayed in a region BP2 on the left side of the level display unit 2100 below the display region 4A. Thus, when a plurality of reserved characters are displayed, the player is informed which reserved character will attack last.

  Further, the name of the enemy character (large boss) is displayed in a lower left area BP3 of the display area 4A. In addition, the name of the special technique to be performed last is displayed in a region BP4 below the region BP3. In the display example, since the special technique is not yet determined, “waiting” is displayed. In addition, in the area BP5 below the area BP4, the name of the reserved character (leader) who makes the last attack is displayed.

  In addition, the total of six techniques displayed in the technique selection list are changed to techniques that are easy to win when a small attack to the large boss of the reserved character is successful (the techniques described in each section are ranked up). ). In this way, every time a small attack of the holding character succeeds, the number of skills that are easy to win increases, so that the player can have an impression that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. In addition, the specific aspect of the technique rank increase is defined in the arrangement lottery table.

  FIG. 71A shows numbers associated with the sections of the technique selection list displayed in the area BP1. Specifically, of the two upper and lower levels of the technique selection list, the upper left section is associated with “section 1”, the middle section with “section 3”, and the right section with “section 5”. Further, the lower left section is associated with “section 2”, the middle section with “section 4”, and the right section with “section 6”.

  FIG. 71B shows a plurality of patterns (arrangement patterns) in which the types of techniques displayed in the sections 1 to 6 of the technique selection list are defined. In the present embodiment, six patterns (arrangement pattern 1 to arrangement pattern 6) are defined as a plurality of arrangement patterns. Arrangement pattern 1 to arrangement pattern 5 are selected when the reserved characters (leaders) who perform the last major attack technique are the reserved characters A to H. In addition, the arrangement pattern 6 is selected when the reserved character (leader) who performs the big attack technique at the end is the reserved character I (that is, when the player is informed that the big hit is confirmed).

  As the types of techniques, rank S technique, rank A technique, rank B technique, rank C technique, and four techniques are defined in the order in which it is easy to win the big boss.

  More specifically, in the arrangement pattern 1, rank B technique is defined for the sections 1 and 2, rank A technique is defined for the sections 3 and 4, and rank C technique is defined for the sections 5 and 6. In the arrangement pattern 2, rank B technique is defined in the sections 1, 2, and 5, rank A technique is defined in the sections 3 and 4, and rank C technique is defined in the section 6. In the arrangement pattern 3, rank B technique is defined for the sections 1 and 5, rank A technique is defined for the sections 2, 3 and 4, and rank C technique is defined for the section 6. In the arrangement pattern 4, rank B technique is defined for the sections 1 and 2, rank A technique is defined for the sections 3 and 4, and rank C technique is defined for the sections 5 and 6. In the arrangement pattern 5, the rank A technique is defined for the sections 1 to 6 (that is, all the sections). In the arrangement pattern 6, rank S techniques are defined for the sections 1 to 6 (that is, all sections). Thus, the arrangement pattern is defined in the order of arrangement pattern 1 to arrangement pattern 6 so that the proportion of the technique that is likely to win the big boss increases in the six sections of the technique selection list.

  In the present embodiment, the technique selection list is divided into six (although there are six options), but there may be any number of options as long as there are a plurality.

  In the arrangement lottery table, the final arrangement, the number of promotion times, the initial arrangement, and a predetermined random number range (for each level at the start of the mode background 5 (starting level), whether or not (losing or big hit) are determined. And lottery value information for determining the final layout and the like determined based on the lottery values extracted (lottery) from “0” to “99”).

  Here, the initial arrangement is an arrangement pattern displayed on the technique selection list at the time when the large boss battle effect is started. The final arrangement is displayed in the technique selection list when the large boss battle effect ends, that is, when the reserved character (leader) indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is the last major attack. This is an arrangement pattern. If the initial arrangement is different from the final arrangement, it indicates that the arrangement pattern has been changed (promoted) after the initial arrangement is displayed.

  The number of times of promotion is the number of times the placement pattern has been changed (promoted) from the initial placement to the final placement. In the present embodiment, after the initial arrangement is displayed, an image in which a reserved character other than the leader (other party member) attacks the big boss is displayed. Thus, if the attack of another party member is successful, the arrangement pattern is promoted.

  More specifically, when the success / failure is a loss and the leader is the holding characters A to H, when the starting level is “80” to “90”, a total of 10 changes according to the lottery value A pattern is defined. In this case, arrangement pattern 1 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 40/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 2 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 20/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 3 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 30/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 4 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 10/100.

  In addition, when the success / failure is lost and the leader is the holding characters A to H, when the starting level is “90” to “98”, a total of 10 change patterns are defined according to the lottery value. ing. In this case, the arrangement pattern 1 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 10/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 2 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 20/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 3 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 30/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 4 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 40/100.

  As described above, when the success or failure is lost and the leader is the holding characters A to H, an arrangement pattern with a higher proportion of the technique that is likely to win the big boss is selected as the final arrangement when the start level is higher. .

  In addition, when the success or failure is a big hit and the leader is the holding character A to H, when the starting level is “80” to “90”, a total of 15 change patterns are defined according to the lottery value. ing. In this case, the arrangement pattern 1 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 5/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 2 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 15/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 3 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 30/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 4 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 40/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 5 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 10/100.

  In addition, when the success or failure is a big hit and the leader is the holding characters A to H, when the start level is “90” to “98”, a total of 15 change patterns are defined according to the lottery value. ing. In this case, the arrangement pattern 1 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 3/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 2 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 13/100. In addition, the arrangement pattern 3 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 29/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 4 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 25/100. Further, the arrangement pattern 5 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 30/100.

  Further, when the success or failure is a big hit and the leader is the reserved characters A to H, one change pattern is defined regardless of the lottery value when the start level is “99”. That is, the arrangement pattern 6 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 100/100.

  Further, when the success or failure is a big hit and the leader is the holding character I, when the starting level is “99”, one change pattern is defined regardless of the lottery value. That is, the arrangement pattern 6 is selected as the final arrangement with a probability of 100/100.

  As described above, when the success / failure is a big hit, an arrangement pattern with a higher proportion of the technique that is likely to win the big boss is selected as the final arrangement when the start level is higher. Further, comparing the case where the success / failure is a loss and the case of a big hit, the arrangement pattern in which the ratio of the technique that easily wins the big boss is selected as the final arrangement in the case of the big hit is selected.

  In the large boss battle effect, as described above, after the initial arrangement is displayed, the party member (the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610) attacks the large boss, and this attack is performed. If is successful, the placement pattern is promoted. The party member attack is set so that the same member among the party members does not repeatedly attack the large boss. In such a case, when the number of character hold images displayed in the hold character display area 610 (the number of hold when changing) is less than the required number of promotions, the promotion cannot be promoted from the initial arrangement to the final arrangement (promotion). Number of times).

  Therefore, when the final arrangement, the number of promotions, and the initial arrangement are determined with reference to the arrangement lottery table, the number of character reserved images displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (the number reserved) and the number of promotions Is compared. Then, when the number of character reserved images displayed in the reserved character display area 610 is less than the required number of promotion times, the initial arrangement is changed.

  Specifically, for example, when the number of character reserved images displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (the number of reserved characters at the time of change) is 1, the initial arrangement is arrangement pattern 1, the number of promotions is 2, and the final arrangement is an arrangement pattern. When the number is determined to be 3, the number of promotion times is insufficient once, so the initial arrangement is changed from arrangement pattern 1 to arrangement pattern 2. According to such a change, since the number of times of promotion required from the initial placement to the final placement is one (that is, the same as the number of suspensions at the time of change), it is possible to avoid a shortage of the number of promotion. it can. In addition, when the number of holds is less than the number of promotion, we changed the initial arrangement pattern to cope with it, but instead of the party member's attack, the leader performs an attack different from the technique in the technique selection list, You may make it promote according to the frequency | count.

[Support Decision Table / Boss Battle Reproduction (Support Reproduction)]
73 and 74 show whether or not a support effect is performed when an effect in which a reserved character battles with an enemy character (boss) in a probability change / short time game state (a boss battle effect during the time of probability change) is executed, and When the support effect is performed, a support determination table for determining the effect content of the support effect is shown.

  In the boss battle effect during the probable change time, the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is selected as the reserved character to battle with the enemy character (boss). When the support effect is performed, not only the character display area 600 but also the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610 is simultaneously selected. In other words, in the boss battle effect during the probable change time, the hold by the character hold image displayed in the hold character display area 610 is displayed in the battle with the enemy character of the hold character indicated by the character hold image displayed in the character display area 600. Characters may support (execute skill production). In this way, in the boss battle effect during the probable change time, when the reserved character wins the enemy character (boss), the big hit is confirmed (the big hit is notified). Further, when the reserved character does not win the enemy character (boss) (when it is defeated by the enemy character), the loss is confirmed (the loss is notified). In addition, you may make it provide the aspect which revives after a defeat and alert | reports a jackpot. Moreover, the character which performs the battle displayed in the boss battle under the certainty change time may be a character not based on hold.

  The support effect is an effect performed in such a boss battle effect at the time of probability change. Specifically, when the support effect is performed, a battle with the enemy character of the reserved character (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “main reserved character” for convenience) indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is performed. The reserved character indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “supported reserved character” for convenience) provides support. Note that the reserved character to be supported is selected from among the reserved characters indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the reserved character display area 610 by a predetermined lottery.

  In addition, the support of the support pending character refers to all actions that are advantageous for a battle with an enemy character, attacking an enemy character, preventing an attack from the enemy character, or the like. The specific content of support is set for each reserved character according to the characteristics of the reserved character. In support production, one support holding character can perform support only once. That is, one support holding character cannot support many times.

  In the support determination table, for each sub variation pattern number determined with reference to the sub variation pattern determination table, the presence / absence of a support effect, the number of times of support when there is a support effect (upper limit), and a predetermined random number range (“ The lottery value information for determining the presence / absence of the support effect and the number of times of support based on the lottery value extracted (lottery) from “0” to “99”) is defined. Thus, by referring to the support determination table, the presence / absence of the support effect and the number of times of support are determined.

  Note that the support effect is performed once at most for each pseudo-ream. In other words, in the case of pseudo-ream 1, the support effect has an upper limit of the support count of one. In addition, in the case of pseudo-ream 2, the support effect has an upper limit of the support frequency of 2 times. In addition, in the case of pseudo-ream 3, the support effect has an upper limit of the support frequency of 3 times. In addition, in the case of pseudo-ream 4, the support effect has an upper limit of the support frequency of 4 times. Note that a plurality of types of support timings are set in one pseudo-ream and are randomly determined by a predetermined lottery.

  In the probability variation / short time gaming state, sub variation pattern numbers 9 to 22 and 36 to 55 are selected.

  More specifically, in the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 9 and 10, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100. In the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 9 and 10, since the time variation is normal, the boss battle effect during the certain variation time is not performed. That is, when the boss battle effect is not performed during the time of probability change (when the battle with the enemy character is not performed), the support effect is naturally not performed. On the other hand, the sub variation pattern numbers 11 to 22 and 36 to 55 are those in which a support effect may be performed because a boss battle effect is performed during the time of probability change.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 11, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 12, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 10/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 90/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 13, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 10/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 90/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 14, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 85/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 15/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 15, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 80/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 15/100. It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 with the probability of.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 16, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 75/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 15/100. It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 with the probability of.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 17, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 70/100, it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 20/100, and 9/100 It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 times, and a support effect with a support count of 3 times is determined with a probability of 1/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 18, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 60/100, it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 20/100, and 19/100 It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 times, and a support effect with a support count of 3 times is determined with a probability of 1/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 19 to 22, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 36, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 37, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 85/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 15/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 38, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 85/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 15/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 39 and 40, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 41, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 75/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 25/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 42, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 70/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 28/100. It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 with the probability of.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 43 and 44, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 45, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 70/100, it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 20/100, and 8/100 It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 times, and a support effect with a support count of 3 times is determined with a probability of 2/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 46, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 60/100, and it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 25/100. It is determined that there is a support effect with a support count of 2 times, and a support effect with a support count of 3 times is determined with a probability of 5/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern numbers 47 and 48, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 49, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 30/100, it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 20/100, and 30/100 It is determined that there is a support production with a support frequency of 2 times with a probability of 15 and a support production with a support frequency of 3 times with a probability of 15/100 and a support frequency of 4 with a probability of 5/100. It is determined that there is a support production.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 50, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 20/100, it is determined that there is a support effect with one support frequency with a probability of 20/100, and 30/100 It is determined that there is a support effect with a support frequency of 2 times, and a support effect with a support frequency of 3 times is determined with a probability of 20/100, and the support frequency is 4 with a probability of 10/100. It is determined that there is a support production.

  In the case of sub variation pattern numbers 51 to 55, it is determined that there is no support effect with a probability of 100/100.

  In this way, it is stipulated that the reach production (the production with a large number of pseudo-reams) with higher expectation of the big hit is easier to perform and the number of times of the support is increased in each case of the loss or big hit. ing. In addition, it is defined that, if the success / failure is a big hit, the support effect is more easily performed and the number of times of support is increased.

  Here, the support effect is performed by a holding character (support holding character) indicated by the character holding image displayed in the holding character display area 610. In addition, one support-pending character cannot be supported many times. Therefore, when the support count is determined with reference to the support determination table, when the determined support count is larger than the number of character reserved images displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (the number of changes on hold). The number of support will be insufficient.

  Therefore, when the support presentation is performed with reference to the support determination table, and the number of times of support is determined, the number of character reserved images displayed in the reserved character display area 610 (the number of times of change on hold) and the number of times of support are displayed. Is compared. Then, when the number of character hold images displayed in the hold character display area 610 (the number of hold when changing) is smaller than the required support count, the determined support count is changed.

  Specifically, for example, when the number of character hold images displayed in the hold character display area 610 (the hold number at the time of change) is 1, and the support count is determined to be 2, the required support count is Since it is insufficient once, the determined support frequency is changed from 2 to 1. According to such a change, since the necessary number of times of support is one (that is, the same as the number of suspensions at the time of change), it is possible to avoid the lack of the number of times of support. Further, the pseudo rendition when the number of times of support is insufficient may not perform the support effect, and the main reserved character may perform an effect such as avoiding an enemy attack. Further, the determined number of pseudo-reams may not be executed. In this case, since the variation time cannot be changed, an effect pattern when the number of support times is insufficient may be provided in advance.

  Further, as indicated by the sub variation pattern numbers 49 and 50, the number of times of support is four only when the result is a big hit. That is, when there are four support members (when the number of character on-hold images displayed in the on-hold character display area 610 is the upper limit), the jackpot is determined. In this way, since it is notified that the jackpot has been determined by the number of support members, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, when the production content is a special battle (sub-variation pattern numbers 19 to 22, 52 to 55), after the big hit game is finished and the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state, the number of games (special symbol) When the number of fluctuations) is 10, 20, or 30, the boss battle effect is always performed in the time of probability change. In this way, when the predetermined lottery is won at the 10th and 20th times when the boss battle effect during the time of probability change is performed, and when the falling lottery is not won at the 30th time, the special effect is performed and the boss battle 1 mode is performed. The mode is changed from boss battle 2 mode. In addition, when the falling lottery is won at the 30th time, the mode is changed from the boss battle 1 mode (boss battle mode) to the normal mode. In addition, when a special effect is performed, a state in which, for example, a weak point of an enemy character (boss) is exposed by the support of the support pending character is displayed.

  In addition, if you win the falling lottery after the 31st time or win a big hit, you will be shown a battle (special battle) with the enemy character (boss), and the big hit round depending on the result of the battle Alternatively, the mode is changed to the normal mode. Specifically, when the enemy character (boss) is won, the game shifts to a big hit round. On the other hand, when defeated by an enemy character (boss), the mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, when the falling lottery is won after the 31st rotation, the time shortening ends at that timing, so electric support does not occur. The player can recognize that the player has surely fallen by confirming that no electric Chu support has occurred. If the time fluctuates for a long time at the time of falling, the game ball will not win the electric chew and the player may suffer a large loss. As a countermeasure, in the variation pattern determination table in FIG. 59, the variation pattern at the time of falling and falling (06H) and the variation pattern at the time of falling after the 31st rotation (0AH) are dedicated variation patterns. (For example, 0BH), a fixed fluctuation pattern shorter than other battle fluctuation patterns such as the first half 00H (0 ms) and the second half 12H (20000 ms) may be used so as not to give the player a sense of loss. Since the fluctuation pattern is the same at the time of loss and the big hit, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the big win is won at the same time as the falling lottery win.

  In the present embodiment, when the content of the effect is a special battle (sub-variation pattern numbers 19 to 22, 52 to 55), the support effect is not performed, but the support effect is performed. May be. Moreover, in that case, you may alert | report confirmation of jackpot.

[Chemical change time short and medium boss type specification table]
FIG. 75 shows a probability variation time short / medium boss type definition table for determining the type of enemy character (boss) in the probability variation / short time gaming state.

  Enemy characters (bosses) are provided in a plurality of types (in this embodiment, six types), and numbers are associated with each other. Specifically, in this embodiment, bosses 1 to 6 are provided as enemy characters (bosses).

  First, when the normal mode is changed to the probable change / short-time game state after the first hit, the boss 1 appears. In this way, when reaching with the boss 1 appearing, a boss battle effect is started during the time of probability change, and a battle between the reserved character and the boss 1 is performed. In this way, in the case of a boss battle production in the time of probability change, if the holding character wins boss 1 and wins 16R big hit (when a definitive round game is started), boss 2 will Will appear. In this way, when a boss battle effect is produced during the time of probability change and a big hit of 16R is made (when a definitive round game is started), a boss with a number obtained by adding 1 to the current boss number appears. . For example, if the reserved character wins boss 2 and wins 16R jackpot in the boss battle production during the probability change time (when a definite round game is started), 1 is assigned to the current boss number “2”. Boss 3 will appear as the boss with the added number.

  On the other hand, if the ally character wins Boss 1 and wins 3R, 6R, 9R, or 16R in a promiscuous boss battle production (when a rank-up round game is started), round game The boss 2 appears inside, and an effect is performed in which a battle is performed with the boss 2 in order to ask the player whether or not to continue the RUSH. In this way, when a 3R, 6R, 9R, or 16R big hit is made in the boss battle effect during probability change (when a rank-up type round game is started), the boss with a number that is 1 added to the current boss number. Will appear during the round game. Even after the round game is over, the boss (the boss 2) having a number obtained by adding 1 to the current boss number will appear. Note that during the round game, instead of boss 2, a normal enemy (Zako enemy) appears as shown in FIG. 76, and boss 2 is displayed at the big hit end interval when the effect of whether or not the round is continued is displayed. You may make it confront the boss | hub 2 from a fluctuation | variation. Also, in the case where the boss 2 appears during the round and the big hit is a probable big hit, the start of the boss battle 2 is executed immediately after the big hit ends, and the fact is notified during the round. It may be. In that case, during the round game, the special effects described above (for example, effects that expose the weak points of enemy characters (bosses) are exposed by the support of the support pending character) are executed, and the boss battle 2 starts immediately after the big hit. Announce that there is. In addition, when the rank-up type round is 16R when performing an effect of performing a battle with the boss 2 during a rank-up type round game, an effect of destroying the boss 2 is executed, and the boss 3 is You may make it appear and confront the boss 3 in subsequent changes.

  The boss 5 is a so-called lath boss. In the state where the boss 5 has appeared, unlike the cases of the bosses 1 to 4, an effect is performed according to the hold information related to the character hold image on which the hold character display area 610 is displayed. Specifically, if the hold information includes a big hit of 16R and the big hit of 16R (that is, in the case of the big hit, any of the hold images remaining in the hold character display area) In the case of 16R big hit), the reserved character wins the battle with the boss 5. When the holding character wins the boss 5 in this way, in a power support state after the end of the big hit game, a special state is executed in which a so-called ending effect is executed until a falling lottery is won. On the other hand, in cases other than those described above, the battle with the boss 5 of the reserved character is a draw (that is, without winning or losing with the boss 5), and then shifts to the big hit round. That is, the boss 5 continues to appear.

  The boss 6 is a special boss (reserved continuous confirmation Zako boss). When the hold information related to the character hold image in which the hold character display area 610 is displayed has a big hit of 16R and a big hit of 3R, 6R, 9R, or 16R (when a rank-up type round game is started) Appears during the rank-up round game. In this way, by making the boss 6 that is easy to win during the round game appear, it is possible to notify the player that a so-called reserved run has been established.

  In the following, a display example of an effect (rank-up effect) using an enemy character (boss) appearing in the probability variation / short time gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. This display example describes an effect example in which a Zako enemy and a friendly character fight not in the next boss in a rank-up type round game. Displaying the next boss can be realized by changing the display of the Zako enemy to the next boss.

  Here, the rank-up effect is a rank-up type round game (3R, 6R, 9R and 16R round games), for example, the round game ends at the third round, or continues after the fourth round (rank up) ) And so on, such as whether or not the round game will continue.

  In FIG. 76 (a), the symbols 3 are stopped and displayed in a state where the symbols 3 are aligned, and the player is informed that the game is a big hit. In the present embodiment, when a big hit other than the symbol 7 is made, it becomes one of the rank-up type big hits.

  Next, in FIG. 76 (b), a round game (3R) is shown. During the round game, an ally character (in this display example, a holding character A) appears and an enemy character appears. In this way, during the round game, the appearance of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed. In addition, every time a game ball wins in the big winning opening, “HIT15” is displayed, and the appearance of damaging the enemy character is displayed.

  Here, in the rank-up type round game, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), at the end of the 3R, 6R and 9R rounds (that is, at the time of branching whether or not the round game is continued), the door The state of closing is displayed. Thus, the door is displayed over the entire area of the display area 4A. Further, when the state that the door is closed is displayed, an image of the button is displayed. Thus, in order to open the door, the player is prompted to operate the push operation button 9A.

  When the door is opened, information about whether the round game is continued or ended is displayed.

  FIG. 76 (d) shows a display example when the round game continues when the door is opened. As shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the round game is continued, when the door is opened, a friendly character (here, reserved character B) is displayed and a message “RUSH continued!” Is displayed. . Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the round game is continued.

  On the other hand, FIG. 77 (d) shows a display example when the round game ends when the door is opened. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), when the round game ends, when the door is opened, a boss character is displayed and a message “Go to Boss Battle” is displayed. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the round game is over.

  Further, after the boss character is displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), a state is displayed in which the boss character swings around the weapon and crushes the screen of the display area 4A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), when the state of crushing the screen of the display area 4A is displayed, the mode is changed from the big hit round to the boss battle mode. Thus, the battle between the ally character and the boss character is performed in the boss battle mode.

  Here, as described above, the mode is changed from the big hit round to the boss battle mode, but the displayed boss characters are the same boss character. That is, in this embodiment, in the boss battle mode, a battle is performed with the boss character that has notified the end of the round game. Thus, the appearance of the boss character for notifying the end of the round game also serves as notification of the opponent who performs the battle in the boss battle mode.

  In this way, in rank-up production, in the rank-up type round game where it is difficult for the player to know how long it will continue, it is possible to notify the end of the big hit and the opponent after the end of the big hit at the same time, so that the boss battle When the mode is changed to the mode (when the electric support state is changed), it is not necessary to notify the opponent, and the electric support state can be changed smoothly.

  Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below.

  In addition, about the process which is the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment (second embodiment). The special symbol memory check process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 23, but the fall determination process in S2009, the big hit determination process in S2010, the special symbol determination process in S2011, and the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S2012 are different. In the special symbol memory check process, the small hit determination process shown in FIG. 67 is not performed.

  In S2009, the main CPU 61 executes a fall determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a falling lottery. The falling lottery is a lottery in which a random value is extracted from a fall determination counter to determine whether or not a fall is won. Details of the fall determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the main CPU 61 executes the fall determination process of S2009, the process proceeds to S2010.

  In S2010, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. Thereby, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state (the probability variation flag is ON), the table for high probability having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. If the value is not a value (the probability change flag is OFF), the jackpot determination table for the non-probability variable gaming state with a small jackpot determination value is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state (the probability variation flag is ON), that is, the probability variation gaming state as a special gaming state in which the gaming state easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this case, the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state is higher than the non-probable gaming state as a non-special gaming state that is more difficult to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability-changing gaming state as the special gaming state.

  The special gaming state is a probability change / short time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, but the special gaming state is at least one of a probability variation gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It may be in one game state. The non-special game state may include a case where the non-probability game state and the short-time game state are entered.

  Specifically, the main CPU 61 extracts the special symbol start storage area which is extracted at the time of winning the game ball and is set first in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Reference is made to the hit determination random number value and the hit random number determination table shown in FIG. The main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number value for jackpot determination (random number for jackpot determination) and the big hit determination value (big hit determination value data) match.

  Thus, in the process of S2010, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When the main CPU 61 ends this process, the process moves to S2011.

  In 2011, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big win, and determining a lost symbol when the big hit is lost. In this process, when the big hit is a variation of the first special symbol, the symbol determination table shown in FIG. When the big hit is a variation of the second special symbol, the symbol determination table shown in FIG.

  Specifically, the main CPU 61 determines the winning symbol determined according to the winning type at the time of winning based on the winning symbol random number value extracted from the big winning symbol determining counter and the referenced symbol determination table. A time selection symbol command and a symbol designation command for designating a special symbol displayed at the time of a change stop are determined. The main CPU 61 sets these commands in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When the main CPU 61 completes this process, the process proceeds to S2012.

  In S2012, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. A variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol determined in the processing of S2011, the result of the jackpot determination determined in the processing of S2010, and the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Store in the area.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When the main CPU 61 completes this process, the process proceeds to S2012.

[Falling judgment processing]
Next, the fall determination process in S2009 executed in the special symbol memory check process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S2101, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability change gaming state. If the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state is not the probability variation gaming state (S2011: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the fall determination process and moves the process to a special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (S2011: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S2102.

  In S2102, the main CPU 61 performs a falling lottery and determines whether or not the result of the falling lottery has been won.

  In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the falling random number determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 61 extracts the special symbol start storage area which is extracted at the time of winning the game ball and is set first in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value for fall determination and the fall random number determination table shown in FIG. 56 are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that the fall has been won when the fall determination random number value matches the fall determination value (fall determination value data).

  In this way, when the main CPU 61 determines that the result of the falling lottery has not been won for the falling (S2102: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the falling determination process and shifts the process to the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the result of the falling lottery has been won for the falling (S2102: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S2103.

  In step S <b> 2103, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2103: NO), it moves the process to S2105. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2103: YES), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S2104. The value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 after the end of one game.

  In S2104, the main CPU 61 clears the probability variation gaming state flag and sets the normal gaming state flag. When the main CPU 61 completes this process, the process moves to S2105.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2103: NO), the probability variation gaming state flag is cleared and the time reduction gaming state flag is set in S2105. When the main CPU 61 ends this process, the process shifts to S2016.

  When the value of the time-count counter is “0” in the probability variation gaming state, the 31st special symbol game is started in the probability variation gaming state. Therefore, if the player falls for the first special symbol game to the 30th special symbol game, the gaming state changes from the probabilistic gaming state (more specifically, probabilistic / short-time gaming state) to short-time gaming state (non-probable variation). (S2103: NO, S2105). In addition, when the 31st special symbol game is won, the game state changes from the probable game state (more specifically, probabilistic / short-time game state) to the normal game state (more specifically, non-probable / non-time-short game). Transition to gaming state.

  Further, in S2106, which is shifted after the processing of S2104 and S2105, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state shift command in the main RAM 63. The gaming state transition command set in the main RAM 63 is transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the gaming state based on the received gaming state transition command, and causes an effect corresponding to the gaming state to be executed. When the main CPU 61 finishes this process, the main CPU 61 ends the fall determination process and moves the process to a special symbol memory check process.

[Hit end interval processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment (second embodiment).

  In S2201, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not “06H” (S2201: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval process and shifts the process to the special symbol control process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is “06H” (S2201: YES), it moves the process to S2201.

  In S2202, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (S2202: NO), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval process and shifts the process to the special symbol control process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S2202: YES), it moves the process to S2203.

  In S2203, the main CPU 61 sets a value (“07H”) indicating a special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 completes this process, the process moves to S2204.

  In S2204, the main CPU 61 sets control data corresponding to the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning in the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 58 and sets the value of the probability variation flag and the short time flag based on the type of the hit selection symbol command. Thus, the main CPU 61 sets the probability variation gaming state flag or the short time gaming state flag as control data. Thus, when the probability variation gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state (more specifically, the probability variation / short time gaming state). In addition, when the short-time gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming state is shifted from the big hit gaming state to the short-time gaming state (more specifically, non-probability change / short-time gaming state). Further, the main CPU 61 sets “30” to the time reduction counter when the probability variation gaming state flag or the short time gaming state flag is set as control data.

  After the process of S2204, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval process, and moves the process to a special symbol control process.

  Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below.

  In addition, about the process which is the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

[Command analysis processing]
81 and 82 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71 of this embodiment (second embodiment). This command analysis processing is generally the same as that shown in FIG. 35, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  In step S2301, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether there is a reception command. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a received command (S2301: YES), it moves the process to S2302. On the other hand, when determining that there is no received command (S2301: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

  In step S2302, the sub CPU 71 reads data of the received command and performs processing according to the data in the subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2303.

  In step S2303, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a demonstration display command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a demonstration display command has been received (S2303: YES), it moves the process to S2304. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the demonstration display command (S2303: NO), it moves the process to S2305.

  In S2304, the sub CPU 71 executes a demo display control process. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2305, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a start winning command is received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received (S2305: YES), it moves the process to S2306. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the start winning command (S2305: NO), it moves the process to S2307.

  In S2306, the sub CPU 71 executes a start winning command reception process. This start winning command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In step S2307, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the variation pattern designation command (S2307: YES), it moves the process to S2308. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the variation pattern designation command (S2307: NO), it moves the process to S2310.

  In S2308, the sub CPU 71 executes a process at the time of receiving a variation pattern designation command. The process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2309.

  In S2309, the sub CPU 71 executes a hold information update process. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the symbol designation command (S2310: YES), it moves the process to S2311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the symbol designation command (S2310: NO), it moves the process to S2312.

  In S2311, the sub CPU 71 executes a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received (S2312: YES), it moves the process to S2313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received (S2312: NO), it moves the process to S2314.

  In S2313, the sub CPU 71 executes a decoration symbol stop process. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2314, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received (S2314: YES), it moves the process to S2315. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received (S2314: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2316.

  In step S2315, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. The winning effect pattern determination process further includes a process of setting “0” in the demonstration display timer and a process of setting “00H” in the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In step S <b> 2316, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special winning opening opening display command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command during opening of the special winning opening (S2316: YES), it moves the process to S2317. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the display command for opening the special winning opening (S2316: NO), it moves the process to S2318.

  In S2317, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during round. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2318, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command is received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received (S2318: YES), it moves the process to S2319. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received a hit end display command (S2318: NO), it moves the process to S2320.

  In S2319, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2320, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received (S2320: YES), it moves the process to S2321. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has not been received (S2320: NO), it moves the process to S2322.

  In S2321, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode transition processing. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2322, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a probability change end command has been received as a received command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a probability change end command (S2322: YES), it moves the process to S2323. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the probability change end command (S2322: NO), it moves the process to S2324.

  In S2323, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode transition processing. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S2324, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

[Process when starting winning command is received]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a start winning command reception process executed by the sub CPU 71.

  First, in S2401, the sub CPU 71 specifies a sub variation pattern number. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the start winning command includes information on the (main) variation pattern type and variation pattern command determined by the main CPU 61. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Thus, the sub CPU 71 specifies the sub variation pattern number according to the predetermined random number value, the gaming state, and the success / failure when the information of the variation pattern type and the variation pattern command is acquired by receiving the start winning command. To do. After completing this process, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2402.

  In S2402, the sub CPU 71 executes a reserved character determination process. Details of the reserved character determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2402, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2403.

  In S2403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state. When the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is OFF (S2403: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2408. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is ON (S2403: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2404.

  In step S2404, the sub CPU 71 executes status determination processing. Details of the status determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2404, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2405.

  In S2405, the sub CPU 71 executes level determination processing. In the level determination process, an effect stage number and a final level when executing a level-up effect are determined. Details of the level execution process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2405, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2406.

  In step S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes a middle boss battle preemption effect determination process. In the middle boss battle production determination process, the production contents of the middle boss battle first production (more specifically, the damage level of the middle boss) are decided. Details of the middle boss battle pre-decision determining process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2406, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2407.

  In S2407, the sub CPU 71 executes a large boss battle effect determination process. In the big boss battle production determination process, the production content of the large boss battle production (more specifically, the special action of the reserved character) is decided. Details of the large boss battle effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2407, the sub CPU 71 ends the start winning command reception process, and moves the process to a command analysis process.

  In S2403, when the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is OFF (S2403: NO), the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (more specifically, Probability / short-time gaming state). Therefore, in S2408, the sub CPU 71 executes a process for determining the presence / absence of the support effect and the number of times of support that can be executed in the boss battle effect during the time of probability change.

  In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the support determination table shown in FIGS. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 refers to the support determination table shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, and determines the presence / absence of the support effect and the number of times of support by random lottery based on the sub variation pattern number specified in S2401. When executing the processing of S2408, the sub CPU 71 ends the start winning command reception processing, and moves the processing to command analysis processing. Note that the support count determined in this process is provisional. The final number of times of support is determined by a process at the time of receiving a variation pattern designation command described later.

  In the start winning command reception process, as described above, the status determination process, the level determination process, the middle boss battle first effect determination process, and the large boss battle effect determination process are each executed in the start winning command reception process. However, it may be executed in the process of receiving a variation pattern designation command, which will be described later.

[Holding character decision process]
Next, the reserved character determination process in S2402 executed in the start winning command reception process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S2501, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is OFF (S2501: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2504. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is ON (S2501: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2502.

  In S2502, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery to determine a determined character number (a number associated with the determined reserved character) based on the reserved character determination table shown in FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the reserved character determination table shown in FIG. 63 and determines the determined character number by random number lottery based on the sub variation pattern number. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2502, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2503.

  In S2503, the sub CPU 71 determines a reserved character from characters other than the currently displayed character among the determined character numbers. In this embodiment, the character hold image displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 is the character hold image in which the hold character indicated by the character hold image is displayed in another display area. Are set so as not to overlap each other. Accordingly, among the reserved characters of the determined character number determined in S2502, one reserved character that does not overlap with the reserved character indicated by the currently reserved character display area 610 and the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 is a predetermined character. Randomly determined by lottery. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2503, the sub CPU 71 ends the reserved character determination process and shifts the process to the start winning command process.

  In S2501, when the game state is not the normal game state, that is, when the normal game state flag is OFF (S2501: NO), the game state is changed to the probability change game state (more specifically, (Probability change / short time gaming state, or non-probability change / short time gaming state). In such a case, the sub CPU 71 determines the next reserved character based on the current final reserved character.

  Here, the current final reserved character is the hold indicated by the newest reserved image (that is, the hold image displayed on the rightmost side) among the character reserved images displayed in the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610. It is a character. Further, the sub CPU 71 sets the order of the reserved character A to the reserved character F with respect to the appearance of the reserved character in the probability variation gaming state.

  Thus, for example, when the current final reserved character is the reserved character A displayed in the first reserved character display area 610a, the next reserved character (the reserved character displayed in the second reserved character display area 610b) is used. , The reserved character B is determined. Further, for example, when the current final reserved character is the reserved character B displayed in the second reserved character display area 610b, as the next reserved character (the reserved character displayed in the third reserved character display area 610c). , The reserved character C is determined. Note that the reserved character may be determined by lottery as in the normal gaming state.

  When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2504, the sub CPU 71 ends the reserved character determination process, and shifts the process to the start winning command reception process.

[Status determination process]
Next, the status determination process in S2404 executed in the start winning command reception process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S2601, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery for determining the status (“HP” and “MP”) of the reserved character based on the status determination table shown in FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the status determination table shown in FIG. 85 and determines “HP” and “MP” by a predetermined lottery based on the determined character number. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2601, the process proceeds to S2602.

  In step S2602, the sub CPU 71 determines whether any one of the values “HP” and “MP” determined in step S2601 is a rough line, or whether the values “HP” and “MP” are the same. . When the sub CPU 71 determines that one of the values of “HP” and “MP” determined in S2601 is a rounded value, or the values of “HP” and “MP” are the same (S2602: If YES, the process moves to S2603. On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 determines that the values of both “HP” and “MP” determined in S2601 are not uniform and the values of “HP” and “MP” are not the same (S2602). : NO), the status determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the process at the time of starting winning command reception.

  In S2603, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss (S2603: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2604.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a big hit (S2603: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the status determination process, and shifts the process to the start winning command reception process. In this case, if either of the values of “HP” and “MP” determined in S2601 is rough, or if the values of “HP” and “MP” are the same, the expectation of jackpot is not intended. Although a feeling is given to the player, the lottery result of the jackpot determination is also a jackpot, so the player's interest is not impaired. Therefore, “HP” and “MP” determined in S2601 are determined as final “HP” and “MP”.

  In step S2604, the sub CPU 71 cancels the state in which either of the values of “HP” and “MP” determined in step S2601 is a rounded pattern or the values of “HP” and “MP” are the same. Until then, draw again. In this way, when the sub CPU 71 cancels the state in which the values of “HP” and “MP” are all round or the values of “HP” and “MP” are the same in S 2604 (S 2604). When the above process is executed), the status determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the process at the time of starting winning command reception.

[Level decision processing]
Next, the level determination process in S2405 executed in the start winning command reception process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S2701, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery to determine the stage and final level in the case of performing the level-up stage based on the level determination table shown in FIGS. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the level determination table, and determines the stage and final level by random lottery based on the sub variation pattern number. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2701, the process proceeds to S2702.

  In S2702, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the determined final level is “77”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined final level is not “77” (S2702: NO), it moves the process to S2706. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined final level is “77” (S2702: YES), it moves the process to S2703.

  In S2703, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss (S2703: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2704.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a big hit (S2703: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the level determination processing and shifts the processing to the start winning command reception processing. In this case, since the final level determined in S2701 is “77”, the expectation of the big hit will be given unintentionally, but the lottery result of the big hit determination is also a big hit, so that the interest of the player is impaired. There is no. Therefore, “77” determined in S2701 is determined as the final final level.

  In S2704, the sub CPU 71 performs lottery again within a predetermined level range until the determined final level becomes a value other than “77”. Thus, when the determined final level is a value other than “77” (when the processing of S2704 is executed), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2705.

  In step S <b> 2705, the sub CPU 71 determines the production content according to the determined final level and the growth type of the reserved character. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 produces the stage contents determined with reference to the level determination table as the production contents, and the growth type (balance type, middle board type, second half type, special type) of the reserved character indicated by the character reserved image. Or a specific level raising method (timing or numerical value of the level to be raised once) is determined. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S2705, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S2706.

  In step S <b> 2706, the sub CPU 71 sets the level to “77” in the middle of the level up to the final level (any timing when the numerical value of the level is increased before the final level). It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the level is not “77” in the middle of the level up to the final level (S2706: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the level determination process and starts the process when the start winning command is received. Move to processing. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the level is “77” during the level up to the final level (S2706: YES), it moves the process to S2707.

  In S2707, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a loss (S2707: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2708.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a big hit (S2707: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the level determination process and shifts the process to the process at the time of receiving the start winning command. In this case, since the level is “77” in the middle of the level up to the final level, the expectation of the big hit will be given unintentionally, but since the lottery result of the big hit judgment is also a big hit, Does not impair the interest of the person. Therefore, the level determined in S2701 is determined as the final final level.

  In S2708, the sub CPU 71 performs lottery within a predetermined level range until all levels become values other than “77” in the middle of the level up to the final level. In this way, when all levels become values other than “77” in the middle of the level up (when the process of S2708 is executed), the sub CPU 71 ends the level determination process and starts the process with a start winning command. Move to processing on reception.

[Medium Boss Battle Pre-decision Produce Processing]
Next, the middle boss battle pre-decision determining process performed in S2406, which is executed in the start winning command reception process, will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S2801, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the determined effect is a middle boss battle effect. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined effect is not the medium boss battle effect (S2801: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the medium boss battle pre-decision effect determination process, and shifts the process to the process for receiving a start winning command. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined effect is the middle boss battle effect (S2801: YES), the process proceeds to S2802.

  In S2802, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery for determining preemptive damage (damage type) based on the medium boss battle preemptive effect determination table shown in FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the middle boss battle pre-decision effect determination table, and determines the type of damage by random lottery based on the success (big hit or miss) and the level of the reserved character at the start of the middle boss battle (runtime level). Make a decision. When the sub-CPU 71 executes the process of S2802, the sub-boss 71 finishes the middle boss battle pre-decision effect determination process, and shifts the process to the process for receiving a start winning command.

[Big boss battle production decision processing]
Next, the large boss battle effect determination process in S2407, which is executed in the start winning command reception process, will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S2901, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the determined effect is a large boss battle effect. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined effect is not the large boss battle effect (S2901: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the large boss battle effect determination process, and shifts the process to a process when a start winning command is received. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined effect is a large boss battle effect (S2901: YES), the process proceeds to S2902.

  In S2902, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery to determine the final arrangement, the number of promotions, and the initial arrangement of the technique selection list displayed in the large boss battle effect based on the arrangement lottery tables shown in FIGS. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the arrangement lottery table, and finally arranges by random lottery based on the success / failure (whether it is a big hit or lose), the reserved character, and the level of the reserved character at the start of the large boss battle (starting level). Determine the number of promotions and initial placement. As will be described later, the initial arrangement is determined with reference to the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation (the number of holdings at the time of fluctuation).

  Thus, when executing the process of S2902, the sub CPU 71 ends the large boss battle effect determination process and shifts the process to the process for receiving a start winning command.

[Process when receiving variation pattern specification command]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the process at the time of receiving a variation pattern designation command executed by the sub CPU 71.

  In step S3001, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a support effect, which is a boss battle effect during the time of probability change. If the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a boss battle effect at the time of probability change and that there is a support effect (S3001: YES), the process proceeds to S3002. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not a boss battle effect at the time of probability change or that there is no support effect (S3001: NO), it moves the process to S3005.

  In S3002, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current hold number is equal to or greater than the support count determined in S2408 of the start winning command reception process. In the present embodiment, the current number of suspensions indicates the number of suspensions at the start of variable display. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the current hold number is equal to or greater than the support count (S3002: YES), it moves the process to S3003. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the current hold number is not equal to or greater than the support count (S3002: NO), it moves the process to S3004.

  In S3003, the sub CPU 71 determines the support count determined in S2408 of the start winning command reception process as the final support count (upper limit), and performs the process of setting the effect data of the support effect corresponding to the reserved character. When executing the process of S3003, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to the command analysis process.

  In step S <b> 3004, the sub CPU 71 determines the final number of support times (upper limit) as the current number of times of reservation, and performs processing for setting the effect data of the support effect according to the on-hold character. When executing the process of S3004, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to the command analysis process. In the present embodiment, the current number of holdings indicates the number of holdings at the start of the variable display, but may indicate the number of holdings at the time of reaching reach. At that time, since the command is not transmitted at the time of reach, the sub CPU 71 measures the time from the start of change to the reach execution time based on the determined change time and effect contents, and based on the number of start winning commands received during that time. The number of holds at the time of reach is calculated and executed.

  In S3001, when it is determined that there is no boss battle effect at the time of a probable change or there is no support effect (S3001: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a normal large boss battle effect. Determine. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not a normal large boss battle effect (S3005: NO), it moves the process to S3009. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the large boss battle effect is normal (S3005: YES), it moves the process to S3006.

  In S3006, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current reserved number is equal to or greater than the number of promotion times determined in S2901 of the large boss battle effect determination process. In the present embodiment, the current number of suspensions indicates the number of suspensions at the start of variable display. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the current pending number is equal to or greater than the number of promotions (S3006: YES), it moves the process to S3007. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the current pending number is not equal to or greater than the number of promotions (S3006: NO), the process proceeds to S3008. In the present embodiment, the current number of holdings indicates the number of holdings at the start of the variable display, but may indicate the number of holdings at the time of reaching reach.

  In S3007, the sub CPU 71 determines the initial arrangement determined in S2901 of the large boss battle effect determination process as the final initial arrangement, and performs a process of setting the effect data. When executing the process of S3007, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command and moves to the command analysis process.

  In step S3008, the sub CPU 71 determines a final initial arrangement based on the current number of reservations so that the number of promotion times is the same as the current number of reservations, and performs processing for setting effect data. When executing the process of S3008, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to the command analysis process.

  Specifically, when the final arrangement, the number of promotion times, and the initial arrangement are determined with reference to the arrangement lottery table, a comparison is made between the reserved number at the start of the change and the number of promotion times. Here, when the number of holding times (the number of character holding images displayed in the holding character display area 610 at the start of change, that is, the holding number when changing) is less than the required number of promotion times, the number is increased from the initial arrangement to the final arrangement. It will not be possible (the number of promotion will be insufficient). Therefore, in such a case, the number of times of promotion (that is, the initial arrangement) is drawn again.

  Further, in S3009, when it is determined in S3005 that it is not a boss battle effect in the normal gaming state (S3005: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data of the effect according to the other variation pattern designation command. Do. When executing the process of S3009, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to the command analysis process.

  Hereinafter, a specific display example (first display example) of the level-up effect when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91.

  90 and 91, it is assumed that the pseudo-ream starts from the mode background 1 (normally 1 (town)). Further, it is assumed that a character hold image indicating the reserved character A is displayed in the character display area 600, and the reserved character A appears in the display area 4A. Further, it is assumed that the current level of the reserved character A is “10”. Note that the growth type of the reserved character A is set to a balance type.

  In FIG. 90A, the current mode background is normally 1 (town). In order to raise the level and promote the stage, the reserved character A displays a state (notice) of winning the enemy character and acquiring an experience value. Thus, the reserved character A has acquired an experience value (level) necessary for promotion to the next stage. Note that FIG. 90A shows “mode 1 being executed” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 90 (b), the reserved character A displays a state where the experience value is acquired and the level becomes “20”. In addition, a state in which the reserved character A is powering up is displayed. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 10 to 20. Note that FIG. 90 (b) shows “at the time of transition from mode 1 to 2” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 90 (c), the mode background shifts from normal 1 (town) to normal 2 (outside). In order to raise the level and promote the stage, the reserved character A is shown to win the enemy character and acquire the experience value. Thus, the reserved character A has acquired an experience value (level) necessary for promotion to the next stage. Note that FIG. 90C shows “mode 2 being executed” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 90 (d), the reserved character A displays a state where the experience value is acquired and the level becomes “40”. In addition, a state in which the reserved character A is powering up is displayed. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 20 to 40. Note that FIG. 90 (d) shows “at the time of transition from mode 2 to 3” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (e), because the stages are promoted in order (specifically, the transition is from normal 2 (outside) to normal 3 (dungeon 1F), and then from normal 3 (dungeon 1F) to normal 4 It is assumed that the mode background is normally 4 (dungeon 2F) (because it has shifted to (dungeon 2F)). Since the reserved character A is defeated by the enemy character (specifically, because the egg could not be destroyed), a state of being depressed is displayed. Thus, in FIG. 91 (e), the reserved character A could not acquire the experience value (level) necessary for promotion to the next stage. For this reason, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is not 80, which is necessary for promotion to the next stage, but 60. FIG. 91 (e) shows “mode 4 being executed” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (f), since the stage could not be promoted, the mode background is normally 4 (dungeon 2F). As described above, when the stage cannot be promoted, the reach corresponding to the current stage (the stage where the promotion of the next stage has failed) is started. Thus, in FIG. 91 (f), the middle boss battle reach (medium boss battle effect) corresponding to the normal 4 is started, and the appearance of the enemy character (middle boss) appearing is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (g), a message “BATTLE started!” Is displayed, and a middle boss battle effect is performed. Further, as a reserved character for performing a battle with an enemy character (medium boss), not only the reserved character A (character reserved image is displayed in the character display area 600) but also the character reserved image in the reserved character display area 610 A state in which the reserved character B and the reserved character C for which “” is displayed is also displayed. Thus, in the middle boss battle effect shown in FIG. 91 (g), a state in which a party is formed by a plurality of reserved characters is displayed.

  As described above, when the level-up effect is performed when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type, the effect that the reserved character defeats the enemy character is performed in order to promote the current stage for each stage. And if a holding character can defeat an enemy character, a stage will be promoted. Thus, the jackpot expectation can be gradually increased. On the other hand, if the reserved character cannot defeat the enemy character, the stage cannot be promoted, and a reach effect corresponding to the current stage is performed.

  In the above display example (first display example), the stage is promoted one by one. For example, from “10” to “40” at a stretch according to the experience value that acquired the level of the reserved character. The mode background may be changed from normal 1 (town) to normal 3 (dungeon 1F). By such an effect, the player can be given an impression that the expectation level of the jackpot has increased at a stretch. Thus, stage promotion (mode background transition) and level up are not limited to the display examples as described above.

  In the above display example (first display example), one notice (a notice to win one enemy character and gain experience) is displayed at the stage where the reserved character stays. However, a plurality of notices may be displayed. For example, the level “10” may be acquired by the first notice, and the level “10” may be obtained by the second notice.

  Hereinafter, a specific display example (second display example) of the level-up effect when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display example (second display example) shown in FIG. 92 is displayed after the same display (effect) as the display example (first display example) shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 is performed halfway. Is. Specifically, the display example (second display example) shown in FIG. 92 is displayed after the same display is performed up to FIG. 90 (d). Therefore, the description up to the display example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 92 (e) after FIG. 90 (d), the reserved character A wins the enemy character (destroys the egg) and gains an experience value in order to raise the level and promote the stage. The state is displayed. Thus, the reserved character A has acquired an experience value (level) necessary for promotion to the next stage. FIG. 92 (e) shows “mode 4 being executed” in the timing of raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 92 (f), it is displayed that the reserved character A has acquired the experience value and the level becomes “80”. In addition, a state in which the reserved character A is powering up is displayed. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 60 to 80. FIG. 92 (f) shows “at the time of transition from mode 4 to 5” among the timings for raising the level.

  Next, in FIG. 92 (f), the mode background shifts from normal 4 (dungeon 2F) to normal 5 (normal boss). In this way, since the promotion to the final stage has been achieved, the reach corresponding to the final stage is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (g), a large boss battle reach (normal large boss battle effect) corresponding to normal 5 is started, and a state in which enemy characters (large bosses) appear is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 92 (h), a message “BATTLE started!” Is displayed, and a normal large boss battle effect is performed. Further, as a reserved character for performing a battle with an enemy character (large boss), not only the reserved character A (character reserved image is displayed in the character display area 600) but also the character reserved image in the reserved character display area 610 A state in which the reserved character B and the reserved character C for which “” is displayed is also displayed. Thus, in the normal large boss battle effect shown in FIG. 92 (h), a state in which a party is formed by a plurality of reserved characters is displayed.

  In this way, when the level-up effect is performed when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type, and when it is promoted to the final stage (unlike the first display example shown in FIGS. 90 and 91) The big boss battle production at the normal time is started. Since the big boss battle production at normal times is a production with a relatively high expectation of big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95, the level-up timing corresponding to the growth type of the reserved character when the level-up effect is performed will be described by comparing each growth type. For convenience, the level up is assumed to increase from level “10” to level “60”.

  FIG. 93 shows the level-up timing when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type after the pre-reach notice.

  First, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the pre-reach effect, a state in which the reserved character A has acquired an experience value is displayed. Thus, the reserved character A is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. In addition, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added to (from 10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), after the pre-reach effect, during the normal reach, the reserved character A displays the experience value. Thus, the reserved character A is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 20 to 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), after the normal reach and before the SP reach development, the reserved character A is shown to acquire the experience value. Thus, the reserved character A is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 40 to 60.

  As described above, when the growth type of the reserved character is the balance type, there is an effect that the level is leveled up evenly (the timing is not biased).

  Next, FIG. 94 shows the level-up timing when the growth type of the reserved character (in FIG. 94, the reserved character B in FIG. 94) is the middle board type after the pre-reach notice.

  First, as shown in FIG. 94A, in the pre-reach effect, the reserved character B has not acquired an experience value. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 remains 10 and is not added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), after the pre-reach effect, during the normal reach, the reserved character B is displayed as acquiring experience points. Thus, the reserved character B is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 10 to 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), after the normal reach and before the SP reach development, the reserved character B is shown to have acquired the experience value. Thus, the reserved character B is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 40 to 60.

  As described above, when the growth type of the reserved character is the middle type, the experience value is not acquired before the reach, and the effect of acquiring many experience values during the normal reach is performed.

  Next, FIG. 95 shows the level-up timing when the growth type of the reserved character (the reserved character C in FIG. 95) is the latter half type after the pre-reach notice.

  First, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the reserved character C has not acquired an experience value in the pre-reach effect. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 remains 10 and is not added.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the reserved character C has not acquired an experience value during the normal reach after the pre-reach effect. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 remains 10 and is not added.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (c), after the normal reach and before the SP reach development, the reserved character C is shown to have acquired the experience value. Thus, the reserved character C is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 10 to 60.

  As described above, when the growth type of the reserved character is the second half type, the experience value is not acquired before the reach and during the normal reach, and the effect of acquiring a lot of experience values before the SP reach development after the normal reach is performed. .

  Thus, when the level-up effect is performed, the level-up timing differs according to the growth type of the reserved character even if the final level is the same. In this way, since various level-up modes can be displayed to the player, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  The level-up timing is set according to the growth type of the reserved character (that is, the level-up timing is the same if the growth type is the same even if the reserved character is a different character, for example). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a dedicated effect performed only by the reserved character is provided for each reserved character and this dedicated effect is performed, the level may be raised at a timing different from the growth type.

  FIG. 96 shows an example of a dedicated effect that only the reserved character performs for each reserved character.

  In FIG. 96, a reserved character C whose growth type is the latter half type appears. In such a case, when a level-up effect is performed, the level rises at a timing as shown in FIG. However, in FIG. 96, an exclusive effect for the reserved character C (an effect such that an experience value can be acquired as it stops at a shift) is performed. In such a case, the level of the reserved character C increases at a timing different from the timing shown in FIG.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the pre-reach effect, the three decorative symbols are displayed (temporarily stopped) with misalignment. In addition, the reserved character C is displayed as having acquired an experience value. Thus, the reserved character C is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. In addition, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added to (from 10).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), after the pre-reach effect, the three decorative symbols are displayed (temporarily stopped) at the misalignment in the normal reach. In addition, the reserved character C is displayed as having acquired an experience value. Thus, the reserved character C is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. The numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 20 to 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), after the normal reach and before the SP reach development, the three decorative symbols are displayed (temporarily stopped) at the misalignment. The reserved character C is displayed as having acquired an experience value. Thus, the reserved character C is displayed in a state where the level has been raised. Further, the numerical value displayed on the level display unit 2100 is added from 40 to 60.

  In this way, when a dedicated effect is performed, the level goes up at a timing different from the growth type of the reserved character, so the player's interest can be enhanced. A dedicated effect is provided for each reserved character. That is, when a dedicated effect is performed, the timing at which the level rises differs depending on the reserved character.

  In the following, a specific display example of the large boss battle effect at the normal time will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99.

  In FIG. 97 to FIG. 99, the reserved character A, the reserved character B, and the reserved character C are displayed as the reserved characters for battle with the enemy character (large boss). In this display example, it is assumed that the reserved character (that is, the leader) displayed in the character display area 600 is the reserved character A. Further, it is assumed that the reserved character B and the reserved character C are the reserved characters (support members) displayed in the reserved character display area 610. 97 to 99, the character hold images displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when a large boss appears and a normal large boss battle effect is started, various types of information indicating the contents of the large boss battle effect are displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (b). Is displayed. Specifically, the technique selection list is displayed in a lower right area BP1 of the display area 4A. In addition, in the area BP2 below the display area 4A, the face image of the reserved character (leader) who makes the last attack using the special technique is displayed. In addition, the name of the enemy character (large boss) is displayed in the lower left area BP3 of the display area 4A. In addition, in the area BP4 below the area BP3, the name of the special technique to be performed last is displayed. In FIG. 97 (b), “Standby” is displayed because the special technique has not yet been determined. In addition, in the area BP5 below the area BP4, the name of the reserved character (leader) who makes the last attack is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 98 (c), a state in which the reserved character C other than the leader is attacking (small attack) the enemy character is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that the attack performed by the reserved character C is successful and the enemy character is damaged. Also, because the enemy character was damaged, the technique shown in the upper right section (section 5) of the total six techniques displayed in the technique selection list was changed from rank C technique to rank B technique. Yes. Thus, the technique shown in the technique selection list is changed to a technique that promotes (ranks up) and is easy to win.

  Next, in FIG. 98 (d), a state in which the reserved character B other than the leader is attacking (small attack) the enemy character is displayed. In addition, it is displayed that the attack performed by the reserved character B is successful and the enemy character is damaged. Also, because the enemy character was damaged, the technique shown in the lower left section (section 2) of the six techniques displayed in the technique selection list was changed from rank B technique to rank A technique. Yes. Thus, the technique shown in the technique selection list is changed to a technique that promotes and is easy to win.

  Next, in FIG. 99 (e), a state in which a technique (deadly technique) that is finally used for an attack is selected from the technique selection list is displayed. Specifically, one of the six sections is in a blinking state, and a state in which the blinking state shifts counterclockwise through the six sections (blinking rotation state) is displayed. In FIG. 99 (e), the upper left section (section 1) of the six sections flashes. In addition, a message such as “PUSH!” And a button image are displayed in the display area 4A. In this way, the player is prompted to stop the blinking rotation state of the technique selection list (select a technique) by operating the push button 9A.

  Next, FIG. 99 (f) shows a display after the player has operated the pressing operation button 9A. In FIG. 99 (f), the blinking rotation state of the technique selection list is stopped, and the lower center section (section 4) is blinked, and the rank A technique is selected. In this way, the player is informed that Rank A technique has been selected as a special technique for the attack performed by the leader. In addition, since the deadly technique is determined, “Rank A technique” is displayed in the area BP4. A state in which the enemy character is won by an attack using the special action (rank A technique) of the reserved character A (leader) is displayed. In this way, when the holding character A wins the enemy character, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as hit symbols, and a big hit is notified. In addition, when the attack using the special action (rank A technique) of the reserved character A is lost, the loss is notified.

  In this way, in the normal large boss battle production, not only one reserved character (leader) but also the other reserved characters (support members) attack the enemy characters and select the special move from the skill selection list. The enemy character is destroyed by an attack using the special technique. These effects can increase the player's expectation level for jackpots and increase the player's interest. Further, since the technique shown in the technique selection list is ranked up by the attack of the other reserved character, the player can immediately recognize that the degree of expectation of the big hit has increased.

  Below, the specific example of a display of the support effect performed by the boss battle effect in the time of probability change is demonstrated using FIG.100 and FIG.101.

  In FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, it is assumed that the reserved character A is displayed as the reserved character that battles with the enemy character (boss).

  In FIG. 100 (a), the three decorative symbols start to change, and the appearance of enemy characters (bosses) appearing. Further, by displaying a message “Battle starts with symbol template!”, The player is informed that the boss battle effect will be started when the reach is reached. It is assumed that the character hold image displayed in the reserved character display area 610 is only the character indicating the reserved character B at the start of the variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 100 (b), since it became reach (symbol temper), a state in which a boss battle effect during the time of probability change is started is displayed. At this time, it is assumed that the reserved character information indicating the reserved character A has the reserved information with the jackpot and it is determined to perform the support effect.

  At the time shown in FIG. 100 (b), the reserved number increases, and the reserved character display area 610 displays characters indicating the reserved character C, the reserved character D, and the reserved character E as character reserved images. Yes. Even in such a case, the reserved character to be supported in the support effect is determined based on the reserved character information at the start of the variable display. That is, in this display example, the reserved character B is determined as the reserved character that performs support (skill production). Thus, when the reserved character B is determined as the reserved character to be supported, it is determined that the support corresponding to the reserved character B is performed.

  Next, in FIG. 100 (c), a message “DANGER” is displayed and the enemy character attacks the reserved character A. In this way, when the enemy character's attack reaches the reserved character A, the reserved character A may be damaged and defeated (that is, the loss may be notified).

  Next, in FIG. 100 (d), a holding character B (determined as a holding character to be supported) appears and a state in which an attack from an enemy character is repelled is displayed. Thus, it is avoided that the holding character A loses because the holding character B performs support (skill production).

  Next, in FIG. 101 (e), a state where the enemy character is won by the attack of the reserved character A is displayed. In this way, when the holding character A wins the enemy character, three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as hit symbols, and a big hit is notified.

  In this way, in the support effect performed in the boss battle effect during the probable change time, not only the reserved character (of the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600) but also the enemy character by support from other reserved characters Can win, so even if there is a possibility that the reserved character will be defeated, the expectation of the big hit remains, so the player's interest can be enhanced.

<Another example of the second embodiment>
Hereinafter, another example of the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 112. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Level takeover character decision table / level takeover production]
First, the level takeover character determination table arranged in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 70 will be described.

  FIG. 102 shows a level takeover character determination table for determining whether or not the level takeover effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and when the level takeover effect is performed, the content of the effect of the takeover effect.

  The level takeover effect is a so-called prefetch notice effect. Specifically, when it is determined that the level takeover effect is to be performed, the holdover character (hereinafter referred to as “new hold character”) indicated by the newly won reserved character image is determined. Then, the reserved character (hereinafter referred to as “existing reserved character”) indicated by the reserved character image displayed before that (that is, already displayed in the character display area 600 and / or the reserved character display area 610). ) To the new reserved character. Then, the new reserved character takes over the level of the new reserved character that has been changed from the existing reserved character, and produces an effect from a relatively high level when the variable display is started. Note that the level takeover means that the level of the previous reserved character is added to the level of the next reserved character.

  For example, when the reserved character B and the reserved character C are displayed as the existing reserved characters and the reserved character A is determined as the new reserved character, the reserved character B and the reserved character C are changed to the reserved character A. The Then, the level acquired by the changed reserved character A (originally reserved character B) is taken over by the changed reserved character A (originally reserved character C). The level acquired by the changed reserved character A (originally reserved character C) is transferred to the new reserved character A. Thus, when the new reserved character A is displayed in the display area 4A, it is possible to produce an effect from a relatively high level already.

  In the level takeover character determination table, for each sub variation pattern number determined with reference to the sub variation pattern determination table, the presence / absence of a level takeover effect, the number of takeovers when there is a level takeover effect (maximum), and a predetermined value And lottery value information for determining the presence / absence of the level takeover effect and the number of takeovers based on the lottery value extracted (lottery) from the random number range (“0” to “99”). In this way, by referring to the level takeover character determination table, the presence / absence of the level takeover effect and the number of takeovers are determined.

  In the level takeover effect, the reserved character indicated by the reserved character image displayed in the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610 becomes the changed reserved character (that is, the reserved character on the level handing side). . Therefore, even when the level takeover effect is performed, the maximum number that can be taken over is four, which is a sum of one of the character display area 600 and three of the four reserved character display areas 610.

  More specifically, in the case of sub variation pattern numbers 1 to 4, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 100/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 5, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 99/100, and it is determined with a probability of 1/100 that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover frequency.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 6, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 95/100, and it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover frequency with a probability of 5/100.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 7, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 90/100, and it is determined with a probability of 10/100 that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 8, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 95/100, and it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 times the number of takeovers with a probability of 5/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 23, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 100/100.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 24, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 80/100, and it is determined with a probability of 10/100 that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover number. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 25, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 75/100, and it is determined with a probability of 15/100 that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover number. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 26, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 70/100, and it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover frequency with a probability of 20/100. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 27, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 80/100, and it is determined with a probability of 10/100 that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover number. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 28, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 75/100, and it is determined with a probability of 15/100 that there is a level takeover effect with one takeover number. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 29, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 70/100, and it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with the number of takeovers of 1 with a probability of 20/100. With the probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 30, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 50/100, and it is determined with a probability of 30/100 that there is a level takeover effect with two takeover times. With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 31, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 50/100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with the number of takeovers of 2 times with a probability of 30/100, and 20 With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 32, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 50/100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with the number of takeovers of 2 times with a probability of 30/100, and 20 With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 33, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 20/100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 times of takeover frequency with a probability of 30/100, and 50 With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 4 takeover times.

  In the case of the sub variation pattern number 34, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 20/100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 times of takeover times with a probability of 30/100, and 50 With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 4 takeover times.

  Further, in the case of the sub variation pattern number 35, it is determined that there is no level takeover effect with a probability of 20/100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 3 times of takeover frequency with a probability of 30/100, and 50 With a probability of / 100, it is determined that there is a level takeover effect with 4 takeover times.

  In this way, in each of the cases where the success or failure is lost and the big hit, the reach production (the production with a large number of pseudo-reams) with a high expectation of the big hit is more likely to perform level takeover and the number of takeovers is increased. It is prescribed. Further, it is stipulated that the level success is more easily performed and the number of takeovers is increased when the success or failure is larger than the loss.

  Here, the level takeover effect is to take over the level from the reserved character indicated by the reserved character image displayed in the character display area 600 and the reserved character display area 610. Therefore, when the number of handovers is determined with reference to the level handover character determination table, if the number of handovers is greater than the number of character reserved images, the number of handovers will be insufficient.

  Therefore, when the level takeover effect is performed with reference to the level takeover character determination table and the number of takeover times is determined, the reserved character image displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 A comparison is made with the number of takeovers. Then, when the number of handovers is larger than the number of character reserved images, the determined number of handovers is changed.

  Specifically, for example, when the number of character hold images displayed in the character display area 600 and the hold character display area 610 is 2, and the number of takeovers is determined to be 3, the required number of takeovers is set. Since it is insufficient once, the determined number of handovers is changed from 3 to 2. According to such a change, it is possible to avoid a shortage of character reserved images with respect to the determined number of handovers.

  Below, the process performed by sub CPU71 is demonstrated below.

  In addition, about the process which is the same as that of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably by attaching | subjecting the same number of steps.

[Command analysis processing]
103 and 104 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71 of this embodiment (another example of the second embodiment). This command analysis processing is almost the same as that shown in FIGS. Specifically, in the present embodiment (another example of the second embodiment), the difference from the second embodiment is a start winning command reception process in S4306 and a variation pattern designation command reception process in S4308. Hereinafter, these processes will be described.

[Process when starting winning command is received]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a start winning command reception process executed by the sub CPU 71 of this embodiment (another example of the second embodiment). The start winning command reception process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. Specifically, in this embodiment (another example of the second embodiment), the difference from the second embodiment is the reserved character determination process in S4402. Hereinafter, this process will be described.

[Holding character decision process]
Next, the reserved character determination process executed in the start winning command reception process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S5001, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the gaming state is a normal gaming state. When the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is OFF (S5001: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5012. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, that is, when the normal gaming state flag is on (S5001: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5002.

  In S5002, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery to determine a determined character number (a number associated with the determined reserved character) based on the reserved character determination table shown in FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the reserved character determination table shown in FIG. 63 and determines the determined character number by random number lottery based on the sub variation pattern number. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5002, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5003.

  In S5003, the sub CPU 71 determines a reserved character from characters other than the currently displayed character among the determined character numbers. This process is almost the same as the process of S2503 in FIG. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5003, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5004.

  In S5004, the sub CPU 71 determines the presence / absence of a level takeover effect and the number (maximum) of takeovers when there is a level takeover effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 refers to the level takeover character determination table shown in FIG. 102, and based on the sub variation pattern number, the presence / absence of the level takeover effect by random lottery and the number of takeovers when the level takeover effect exists. (Maximum) is determined. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5004, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5005. If there is no change, there is no character to be handed over, so there is no takeover effect.

  In step S5005, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a level takeover effect as a result of the processing in step S5004. If the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a level takeover effect (S5005: YES), it moves the process to S5006. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no level takeover effect (S5005: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the reserved character determination process and moves the process to the start winning command process.

  In S5006, the sub CPU 71 turns on the takeover flag. The takeover flag is a flag indicating whether or not there is a level takeover effect. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5006, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5007.

  In step S5007, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current reserved number is equal to or greater than the number of takeovers (maximum). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the current hold number is not equal to or greater than the take over number (maximum) (S5007: NO), it moves the process to S5011. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the current reserved number is equal to or greater than the number of takeovers (maximum) (S5007: YES), it moves the process to S5008.

  In step S5008, the sub CPU 71 changes the reserved character images for the number of hand overs to those indicating the determined reserved character. For example, when the determined reserved character is the reserved character A, the reserved character images for the number of takeovers are changed to those indicating the reserved character A. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5008, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5009.

  In step S5009, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the takeover number is four. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover number is 4 (S5009: YES), it moves the process to S5010. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of takeovers is not 4 (S5009: NO), it ends the reserved character determination process and moves the process to the start winning command process.

  In step S5010, the sub CPU 71 sets a flag for changing the currently changing reserved character to the determined reserved character. That is, when the number of transfer is 4, it is not sufficient to change the reserved character indicated by the reserved character image displayed in the reserved character display area 610. Therefore, the reserved character image displayed in the character display area 600 is not changed. The reserved character to be shown will be changed. Note that the reserved character indicated by the reserved character image displayed in the character display area 600 may not be changed depending on the status (timing) of the effect. Therefore, by setting the flag in this way, I am trying to change it. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5010, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to a start winning command process.

  In S5011, when it is determined in S5007 that the current reserved number is not equal to or more than the takeover number (maximum) (S5007: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines the number of reserved character images to be changed to the determined reserved character (that is, the reserved character). The number of reserved characters indicated by the character image is determined based on the current number of reserved characters. Thus, there is no shortage in the number of takeovers finally determined. For example, if the reserved number is 0, the takeover number is also set to 0. That is, in this case, the reserved character is not changed. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5011, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to a start winning command process.

  When it is determined in S5001 that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S5001: NO), in S5012 the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (more specifically, the probability variation / short-time gaming state, or the non-probability variation / It is assumed that it is a short-time gaming state). In such a case, the sub CPU 71 determines the next reserved character based on the current final reserved character. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5012, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to a start winning command process.

[Process when receiving variation pattern specification command]
Next, the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command executed in the command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S5101, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the takeover flag is on. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover flag is on (S5101: YES), it moves the process to S5102. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover flag is OFF (S5101: NO), it moves the process to S5110.

  In step S5102, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the takeover hold (the hold character on the level transfer side) remains. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover hold (the hold character on the level handing side) remains (S5102: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5104. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no takeover hold (the hold character on the level handing side) (S5102: NO), it moves the process to S5103.

  In step S5103, the sub CPU 71 turns off the takeover flag. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5103, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5104.

  In S5104, the sub CPU 71 sets the level value of the previous reserved character as the initial level (first displayed level) value of the current reserved character, and sets the final level value of the current reserved character. to add. The “previous reserved character” indicates the reserved character displayed in the character display area 600 and indicated by the reserved character image whose level up has been completed. The “currently reserved character” is the reserved character indicated by the reserved character image that is transferred from the reserved character display area 610 to the character display area 600, and indicates the reserved character to be upgraded.

  For example, it is assumed that the level value of the previous reserved character is “20”. Further, it is assumed that the reserved character this time has an initial level value of “10” and a final level value of “40”. In such a case, by performing the processing of S5104, the value of the initial level of the reserved character this time is set to “20” instead of “10”. In addition, the final level of the reserved character this time is “60” obtained by adding “20” to “40”.

  When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5104, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5105.

  In step S5105, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the final level of the current reserved character (more specifically, the final level when the level is taken over from the previous reserved character) exceeds the level “99”. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the final level of the current reserved character exceeds the level “99” (S5105: YES), it moves the process to S5106. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the final level of the current reserved character does not exceed the level “99” (S5105: NO), it moves the process to S5109.

  In S5106, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the lottery result of the big hit determination is a win. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is a win (S5106: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S5108. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result of the big hit determination is lost (S5106: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S5107.

  In step S5107, the sub CPU 71 sets the final level to “98”. That is, even if the big hit determination is out of place, there is a possibility that the final level reaches “99” by taking over the level. Here, the final level “99” is to determine the big hit. Therefore, by performing the processing of S5107, it is prevented that the final level becomes a numerical value that suggests a big hit and the expectation of the big hit is given, but the player's interest is not lost due to a loss. be able to. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5107, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5109.

  In step S5108, the sub CPU 71 sets the final level to “99”. That is, by taking over the level, there is a possibility that the final level after taking over becomes a value larger than “99”. Here, in this embodiment, even if it is a big hit, the upper limit of the final level is “99”. Therefore, by performing the process of S5108, a value larger than the upper limit value of the final level is not determined. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5108, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S5109.

  In step S <b> 5109, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for effects according to the final level value. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5109, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to the command analysis process.

  In step S <b> 5110, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for effects according to other variation pattern designation commands. When the sub CPU 71 executes the process of S5110, the sub CPU 71 ends the process at the time of receiving the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to a command analysis process.

  Hereinafter, a specific display example of the level takeover effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 108 (a), it is assumed that the character hold image indicating the hold character A is displayed in the character display area 600. Further, it is assumed that a character hold image indicating the hold character B is displayed in the first hold character display area 610a in the hold character display area 610. Further, it is assumed that the character hold image indicating the hold character C is displayed in the second hold character display area 610b. The mode background is normally 1 (town). Further, it is assumed that the level of the reserved character A is “10”.

  Next, in FIG. 108 (b), it is assumed that the hold information is newly acquired and it is decided to perform the level takeover effect with two takeover times. Further, it is assumed that the reserved character D is determined as a new reserved character (a reserved character that takes over the level).

  Thus, new hold information (a character hold image indicating the hold character D) is displayed in the third hold character display area 610c. In addition, since the number of handovers is two times, the first and second reserved character display areas (first reserved character display area 610a and second reserved character display area 610b) are reserved from the third reserved character display area 610c. Each character has been changed to a reserved character D. In this way, the changed reserved character D in the first reserved character display area 610a and the second reserved character display area 610b hands over the level to the reserved character D in the third reserved character display area 610c. In addition, in this example, each reserved character to be handed over is changed at the same time as the display of a new reserved character, but it may be executed due to a changing effect or when the hold is subtracted. It is not limited. Further, in FIG. 108 (b), the reserved character D in the third reserved character display area 610c that is the level takeover target is highlighted, but the highlighting mode in which the highlighted display is not executed can be changed as appropriate. It is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), all the character hold images are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In accordance with the shift, the highlighted display of the reserved character D in the second reserved character display area 610b that is the target to be transferred is also shifted. Thus, the character reserved image displayed in the first reserved character display area 610a is displayed in the character display area 600, and the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the character reserved image. The reserved character D indicated by the character reserved image displayed in the character display area 600 has an experience value in the display area 4A, and the level is promoted from “10” to “20”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), all the character hold images are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In accordance with the shift, the highlighted display of the reserved character D in the first reserved character display area 610a that is the target to be transferred is also shifted. Thus, the character reserved image displayed in the first reserved character display area 610a is displayed in the character display area 600, and the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the character reserved image. At this time, the reserved character D (new reserved character D) indicated by the character reserved image newly displayed in the character display area 600 takes over the last level “20” of the previous reserved character D ( That is, it does not return to level “10”). Further, since the new reserved character D has the final level 20 determined based on the level determination tables of FIGS. 65 and 66, the final level “20” determined as the initial level “20” is set. The added “40” is determined as the final level after the takeover, the experience value is acquired in the display area 4A, the level is increased to “40”, and the fluctuation is finished.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), all the character hold images are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In this way, the character hold image that has started the takeover effect is displayed in the character display area 600, and the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started based on the character hold image. In accordance with the shift, the highlighted display of the character D in the character display area 600 that is a target for the handover is also shifted. At this time, the new reserved character D takes over the level “40” which is the final level of the previous reserved character B. Further, since the new reserved character D has the final level 20 determined on the basis of the level determination tables of FIGS. 65 and 66, the final level “20” determined as the initial level “40” is set. The added “60” is determined as the final level after the takeover, the experience value is acquired in the display area 4A, and the level is increased to “60”. Thus, in this display example, the takeover effect has been successful, and all levels that have been taken over can be taken over by the last reserved character D. In this way, as shown in FIG. 109 (f), a reach effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot is performed according to the mode background.

  In addition, it may be made to perform the effect (hand-over failure effect) which looks and fails when the level takeover effect is executed. In FIG. 110 (e), the level has not increased from the state shown in FIG. 108 (d), and the new reserved character D has failed to take over the level of the previous reserved character D. As described above, in the level takeover effect, if the level takeover fails, it is not possible to take over all the levels to be taken over to the last reserved character D. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 110 (f), a reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is performed according to the mode background.

  Here, in another example of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), even if the level takeover effect fails in the level takeover effect, the effect that the level takeover is attempted again (below, "Continue production").

  Hereinafter, a specific display example of the continue effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112.

  FIG. 111 shows a continuation of the state shown in FIG. 110 (e). In FIG. 110 (e), it is assumed that new hold information has been acquired and it has been decided to perform a continue effect. The “continue effect” is an effect of taking over the level again as described above. Therefore, the reserved character that takes over the level needs to be the same as the reserved character that has taken over the level in the level takeover effect (that is, the reserved character D in this display example).

  In FIG. 110 (e), the new hold information (character hold image) is displayed in the third hold character display area 610c in the hold character display area 610. That is, between the character hold image that has started the takeover effect (in FIG. 110 (e), the character hold image that is displayed in the character display area 600) and the character hold image that starts the continue effect, Two character display images showing the reserved character A and the reserved character C are displayed. Thus, at first glance, the character hold image displayed in the character display area 600 and the character hold image for starting the continuation effect are displayed so as to have no relationship with respect to the effect. In the continue effect, it is desirable not to execute the highlighting as described above.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), all the character hold images are moved and displayed so as to shift to the left. In the state shown in FIG. 111 (g), the character reserved image for starting the continue effect is displayed in the second reserved character display area 610b (not displayed in the character display area 600 yet). In this state, the mode background is usually 1 (town) of the basic pattern. In this state, the message “Continue?” Is displayed in the display area 4A. In this way, the player is informed that there is a possibility that the continuation effect is performed and the level transfer is performed.

  Thus, FIG. 111 (h) shows a state in which the character hold image for which the continue effect is started is displayed in the character display area 600. In this state, the state shown in FIG. 110 (e), that is, the scene where the level takeover has failed in the level takeover effect is displayed again in the display area 4A. In addition, the mode background is normally 1 (town) in the previous fluctuation display, but in this state, it is normally 4 (dungeon 2) when the level takeover fails. Further, the level display unit 2100 displays the level value (in this display example, level “40”) displayed in the reach effect when the level takeover effect fails in the level takeover effect. In this way, the player is notified that the character hold image currently displayed in the character display area 600 has a relationship with the level takeover effect in which the previous takeover has failed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (h), a message “Continue?” And an image of a button are displayed in the display area 4A. In this way, by operating the push button 9A, the player is prompted to perform the continue effect (that is, to take over the level again).

  Next, FIG. 111 (i) shows a state in which the push operation button 9A has been operated by the player and the continuation effect has been successfully achieved. In FIG. 111 (i), a state in which the reserved character B is powered up is displayed. In addition, a message “continue success!” Is displayed in the display area 4A.

  Thus, the continuation of FIG. 110 (e) is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (j). That is, the level value in the state of FIG. 110 (e) is maintained, and the mode background is usually 4 (dungeon 2F). The reserved character D has acquired an experience value in the display area 4A.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 112 (k), the level of the reserved character D rises to “60”, and the mode background also shifts to normal 5 (normal boss). Thus, when a large boss appears, a normal large boss battle effect is started. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112 (l), when the reserved character D wins the big boss in the normal big boss battle, the big hit is confirmed and the effect of notifying the big hit is performed.

  As described above, in another example of the present embodiment, even when the level takeover effect fails in the level takeover effect, it is possible to perform a continue effect that attempts to take over the level again. In this way, the player's interest can be enhanced by performing an effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot, such as a revival effect, despite the failure of the level takeover effect.

  In the case of the continue effect, the failure of the takeover effect is determined, and there is a hold that does not result in a big hit during execution of the prefetch effect including the takeover effect. It is possible to execute when the continuation effect execution lottery is won by probability. Further, the continue effect is performed by the character hold image displayed in the hold character display area 610 while the character hold image that has started the takeover effect is displayed in the character display area 600.

  In addition, the continuation effect is resumed from normal 1 (town) when the mode background is normally 1 (town) or normal 2 (outside), and normally 3 (dungeon) when it occurs normally 3 (dungeon 1F). 1F), if it occurs normally at 4 (dungeon 2F), it can be resumed from normal 4 (dungeon 2F). Thus, when it normally occurs in 4 (dungeon 2F), it will always develop beyond boss reach, so the expectation of big hit is very high (super hot) production. In addition, the execution condition of the continue effect and the effect content at the time of execution can be set as appropriate.

  The takeover failure effect is determined mainly when the suspension for executing the takeover effect is lost. However, after executing the takeover failure effect in a part of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit, the boss may be won within the fluctuation to be a big hit. Even in such a case, it is desirable to define the selection rate as a rare case and set the selection rate so that the big hit expectation is higher when the succession is successful. Of course, when the takeover fails, the loss may be determined by the change (not selected at the time of big hit), and the subsequent continuation effect may be expected.

  The second embodiment also illustrates a pachinko gaming machine as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be other gaming machines such as a pachislot gaming machine and various enclosed gaming machines. Good. For example, when applied to a pachislot machine, if a big win is won, the big win starts automatically. However, in the pachislot machine, a bonus or ART game corresponding to the big win is automatically displayed by displaying a predetermined symbol after winning. It doesn't have to start. Further, the condition for starting the big hit lottery may be a condition that a prescribed number of medals as game media are inserted and the start lever is operated. In addition, it is needless to say that the numerical values, information, components, and the like shown in the present embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Game board and peripheral members]
FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming board 1 and its peripheral members of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (third embodiment). As shown in FIG. 113, the game board 1 has a front frame 11 and a rear frame 12, which are integrally formed. The front frame 11 is provided with the above-described guide rails 30 and 30 ′, the ordinary electric accessory unit 3400, the attacker unit 3500, and the like, and the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is exposed forward in the center of these. An opening 11A for this purpose is formed. The rear frame 12 is provided with a logo unit 1000 so as to be located at the upper peripheral edge of the opening 11A of the front frame 11, and a decorative member 1500 is provided so that a part thereof is exposed along the peripheral edge of the opening 11A. .

  An accessory unit 2000 is arranged behind the rear frame 12. The accessory unit 2000 includes a level display unit 2100 and a shutter device 2200. The level display unit 2100 and the shutter device 2200 are arranged so that a part thereof is exposed along the periphery of the opening 11A of the front frame 11 when not operating, and can be moved toward the center of the opening 11A when operating. ing. The front frame 11 and the rear frame 12 of the game board 1 and the accessory unit 2000 are attached to the rear frame base plate 3b. In the center of the rear frame base plate 3b, the liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed so that the display area 4A is exposed forward.

[Logo unit]
Next, the logo unit 1000 in the gaming board 1 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the logo unit 1000. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the logo unit 1000. FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective view showing the back side of the logo unit 1000. FIG. 117 is a front view of the logo unit 1000. FIG. 118 is a perspective view showing a character block 1200 of the logo unit 1000. FIG. 119 is a perspective view showing the back side of the character block 1200 of the logo unit 1000. 120 is a front view showing the LED substrate 1100 of the logo unit 1000. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the logo unit 1000 mainly includes an LED substrate 1100, a plurality of independent character blocks 1200, and a front cover 1300. The LED substrate 1100 is disposed behind the front cover 1300 and the character block 1200. The plurality of character blocks 1200 are arranged such that a main part on which characters are formed is exposed and protrudes forward from the front cover 1300. The front cover 1300 is fixed to the upper part of the rear frame 12 of the game board 1. Note that the character block 1200 is formed in a three-dimensional character shape that can identify the character type when viewed from the front, but for convenience, the character block 1200 is illustrated as a three-dimensional shape that cannot identify the character type.

  As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of LEDs 1110 are provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 1100 so as to correspond to the character blocks 1200, respectively. The plurality of LEDs 1110 corresponding to each character block 1200 are arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right ends along the periphery of the character block 1200 when viewed from the front. For example, when focusing on the leftmost character block 1200, one LED 1110a is arranged so as to correspond to the upper end portion of the character block 1200, and two LEDs 1110b, 1110c are arranged so as to correspond to the left end portion of the character block 1200. One LED 1110d is disposed so as to correspond to the lower end portion of the character block 1200, and two LEDs 1110e and 1110f are disposed so as to correspond to the right end portion of the character block 1200. As indicated by broken lines in FIG. 120, for example, the LEDs 1110a to 1110c corresponding to the upper end portion and the left end portion of the character block 1200 can be controlled by the sub CPU 71 as LEDs belonging to the first group. The LEDs 1110d to 1110f corresponding to the lower end and the right end of the block 1200 can be controlled by the sub CPU 71 as LEDs belonging to the second group. Similarly, a plurality of LEDs 1110 corresponding to other character blocks 1200 can be controlled to be lit in the first group and the second group. Some character blocks 1200 are arranged so that only one LED 1110 corresponds to the left end or the right end. However, in any character block 1200, at least one end is provided at each of the upper, lower, left, and right ends. Two LEDs 1110 are arranged to correspond.

  According to such an arrangement of the LEDs 1110, when the first group of LEDs 1110a to 1110c and the second group of LEDs 1110d to 1110f are simultaneously turned on for one character block 1200, the entire character block 1200 is caused to emit light uniformly. Can do. For example, when only the LEDs 1110a to 1110c of the first group are turned on, the upper half of the character block 1200 can be made to emit light, while when only the LEDs 1110d to 1110f of the second group are turned on, The lower half of the character block 1200 can be made to emit light, and the visual effect can be enhanced by changing the light emission mode of the character by the character block 1200. Further, the LED blocks 1110 of the first group and the second group are turned on sequentially, the LED blocks 1110 of the first group and the second group are turned on alternately, or the first group. By turning on the LEDs 1110 of the second group at the same time, it is possible to cause the characters to emit light in order in a variety of light emission modes and to make it possible to clearly read a logo or the like. The grouping of the LEDs 1110a to 1110f is not divided for each single character block 1200, but may be grouped over a plurality of character blocks 1200.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the character block 1200 is formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting transparent material. The character block 1200 has a character portion 1211, an edge portion 1212, and a side wall portion 1220 as a portion protruding forward from the front cover 1300, and has a concave hollow portion 1230 and a partition portion 1240 as a portion on the back side. A fixing attachment portion 1250 is provided behind the side wall portion 1220 so as to extend downward. A plurality of pinholes 1260 for positioning and screw holes 1270 for screwing are formed in the attachment portion 1250. As shown in FIG. 117, a gap is formed between adjacent side wall 1220 and side wall 1220 of character block 1200 so that the outer surface of upper part 1310 of front cover 1300 described later can be seen from the front. Is done.

  The character part 1211 is formed in a convex shape protruding forward from the border part 1212. Characters are drawn on the surface of the character part 1211 by secondary processing such as printing with a non-light-transmitting material. The edge portion 1212 is formed so as to substantially follow the outline of the character, and is formed so as to be slightly recessed backward from the character portion 1211. Secondary processing such as printing is not performed on the surface of the edging portion 1212. Therefore, the light from the LED 1110 passes through the surface of the edging portion 1212 and is emitted outward. The side wall portion 1220 functions as a light guide portion that guides light from the LED 1110 to the rim portion 1212, and also functions as a portion that can irradiate light outward from the surface. The surface of the side wall portion 1220 is not subjected to secondary processing such as printing, whereby the light from the LED 1110 is also emitted outward from the surface of the side wall portion 1220. Depending on the character type, an edge portion 1212 is also formed on the inner side portion of the character portion 1211 in plan view (not shown), but light is also emitted outward from such an edge portion 1212. Further, the character portion 1211 of the character block 1200 may have a predetermined shape such as a graphic or character other than characters.

  The hollow portion 1230 may be divided into two portions on the left and right sides of the character block 1200 by the partition portion 1240, and depending on the character type, the partition portion 1240 may not be provided and only one portion may be provided. The partition portion 1240 mainly functions as a light guide portion that guides light from the LED 1110 to an edge portion 1212 (not shown) formed in the plan view inner portion of the character portion 1211. The partition part 1240 also functions as a structural reinforcement part of the character block 1200. Light from the LED 1110 is also guided to the hollow portion 1230 and reaches the back surface of the character portion 1211, but light does not leak outward from the character portion 1211 due to surface processing of the character portion 1211. On the other hand, light that has entered the side wall 1220 and the partition 1240 that form the periphery from the cavity 1230 is guided to the rim 1212 and is emitted outward from the rim 1212. . Note that the character portion 1211 may be configured such that light leaks outward by surface processing. Further, a plurality of partition portions 1240 may be provided in one character block 1200, and the cavity portion 1230 may be partitioned more than two.

  The mounting portion 1250 is aligned by inserting two pins 1312 provided on the back surface of the upper portion 1310 of the front cover 1300, which will be described later, into the pinhole 1260, and further provided on the back surface of the lower portion 1320 of the front cover 1300. The screw hole 1270 is aligned with the screw hole 1321 and fixed by screw fastening. Such a fixing portion of the attachment portion 1250 is covered and hidden by the lower portion 1320 of the front cover 1300 so that it cannot be seen from the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 119, on the back side of the character block 1200, a pair of convex portions 1280, a concave portion 1281, a protruding convex portion 1282, a button-shaped convex portion 1283, and a convex portion 1284 protruding downward are formed. Yes. A slope portion 1241 is formed at an intermediate portion of the partition portion 1240. The pair of convex portions 1280 are positioned so as to be lined up on the upper side of the back surface of the character block 1200 and are positioned with respect to the concave portion (not shown) of the LED substrate 1100. The recess 1281 is located above the mounting portion 1250 and is used as a positioning mark for the LED substrate 1100. The convex portion 1282 is positioned on the side of the concave portion 1281 and is positioned with respect to a notched concave portion (not shown) provided at the lower end of the LED substrate 1100. The convex portion 1283 is located between the concave portion 1281 and the screw hole 1270 and is used as a mark for positioning with respect to the screw hole 1270. The convex portion 1284 is positioned at the lower end of the mounting portion 1250 and is positioned with respect to a concave portion (not shown) provided in a separate member from the LED substrate 1100 and the like. The slope portion 1241 is formed so as to efficiently distribute the light from the LED 1110 to the rim portion 1212. Note that the slope portion 1241 may or may not be provided at a plurality of locations depending on the shape of the cavity portion 1230.

  According to such a character block 1200, since it is provided so as to protrude from the front cover 1300 independently of each other while forming a gap between the adjacent side wall portion 1220 and the side wall portion 1220, the character block 1200 is drawn on the front cover 1300. Each character can be emitted without hindering the visibility of the decorative design.

  Further, since the character portion 1211 does not transmit light and the peripheral portions (the border portion 1212 and the side wall portion 1220) of the character portion 1211 appear to emit light, the characters formed on the character portion 1211 clearly appear. It can be made visible, and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the front cover 1300 includes a light-transmitting upper portion 1310 having a decorative design on the outer surface, and a non-light-transmitting lower portion 1320 having a title and the like drawn on the outer surface. Have. The upper portion 1310 is formed with an opening 1311 for projecting the character portion 1211 of the character block 1200 and the like toward the front, and a pair of pins 1312 for alignment are formed below the opening 1311 on the back side. Yes. A screw hole 1321 for screwing for fixing the attachment portion 1250 of the character block 1200 is formed on the back surface of the lower portion 1320.

  According to such a front cover 1300, the decorative design can be visually recognized by the light leaking from the side wall portion 1220 even from the gap between the adjacent character block 1200 and the character block 1200. It becomes possible to raise. Further, the attachment portion 1250 of the character block 1200 is fixed to the back side of the lower portion 1320 of the front cover 1300, and the fixed attachment portion 1250 is devised so that it cannot be seen from the outside by the non-light transmissive lower portion 1320. Therefore, the design of the logo unit 1000 can be improved without deteriorating the decorative design of the upper portion 1310 and the aesthetic appearance of the character block 1200.

[Functional unit]
Next, the accessory unit 2000 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the accessory unit 2000 in the standby state. FIG. 122 is a front view of the accessory unit 2000 in the standby state. FIG. 123 is a rear view of the accessory unit 2000 in the standby state. FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the accessory unit 2000 in the appearance state. FIG. 125 is a front view of the accessory unit 2000 in the appearance state. FIG. 126 is a rear view of the accessory unit 2000 in the appearance state. 127 is a main part perspective view showing the main part of the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 128 is a main part cutout rear view showing the main part of the accessory unit 2000. FIG. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the level display unit 2100 in the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view showing the rotating member 2110 in the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 131 is a plan view showing the diffusing lens 2113 included in the rotating member 2110 in the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 132 is a side view showing the level display unit 2100 in the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 133 is a front view of the level display unit 2100 in the accessory unit 2000. 134 and 135 are rear views showing the LED substrate 2130 of the level display unit 2100 in the accessory unit 2000. FIG. 124 to 127 show a state in which the shutter device 2200 in the accessory unit 2000 is operated.

  As shown in FIGS. 121, 122, 124, and 125, the accessory unit 2000 mainly includes a level display unit 2100 and a shutter device 2200. As shown in FIG. 113, the level display unit 2100 and the shutter device 2200 are attached to the rear frame base plate 3b behind the game board 1 (rear frame 12). As shown in FIG. 45, the level display unit 2100 is arranged so that a part of the upper part thereof overlaps the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the standby state (non-operating state), although not particularly illustrated. During operation, the drive mechanism is configured to move toward the center. The shutter device 2200 is arranged such that part or all of the shutter device 2200 does not overlap the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the standby state (non-operating state), and will be described later in the appearance state (during operation). The first movable unit 2220 and the second movable unit 2230 are configured to move toward the center of the display area 4A.

[Shutter device]
First, the shutter device 2200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The shutter device 2200 mainly has a drive unit 2240A for driving the lower and upper base members 2210A and 2210B, the first movable unit 2220, the second movable unit 2230, the first movable unit 2220, and the second movable unit 2230, respectively. 2240B.

  The lower base member 2210A is fixed to the left and right sides of the lower portion of the rear frame base plate 3b (see FIG. 113), and supports the first movable unit 2220 and the drive unit 2240A in a connected state. The upper base member 2210B is fixed to the upper part of the rear frame base plate 3b (see FIG. 113) and supports the second movable unit 2230 and the drive unit 2240B in a connected state. The first movable unit 2220 is composed of a pair of left and right, and a space having a predetermined interval in which the second movable unit 2230 can be arranged during operation is formed between the first movable units 2220. The second movable unit 2230 is also configured as a pair of left and right, and is positioned between the first movable units 2220 in conjunction with the operation of the first movable unit 2220.

  As shown in FIGS. 122, 123, 125, and 126, the lower base member 2210A is provided with a guide rail 2211A for moving and guiding the first movable unit 2220 in the left-right direction. The guide rail 2211A is formed such that the height thereof is lowered by a predetermined dimension as it proceeds from the left and right end portions to the center portion, and is inclined downward at the intermediate portion. In addition to the drive unit 2240A, a drive unit 2190 for driving the level display unit 2100 is incorporated in the lower base member 2210A.

  The drive unit 2240B is incorporated in the upper base member 2210B. In addition, guide rails 2211B for moving and guiding the first movable unit 2220 in the left-right direction are provided on both the left and right sides of the base member 2210B. The guide rail 2211B is formed in a long rectangular box shape having an open surface at the bottom. In addition, the guide rail 2211B should just be a hollow inside, and is not limited to a long rectangle. Further, the first movable unit 2220 is not limited to the left-right direction, and may be moved to any direction, for example, the up-down direction. In this case, the open surface of the guide rail 2211B is not limited to the lower part, and may be provided at a position other than the lower part as long as it is a position corresponding to the moving direction of the first movable unit 2220. The guide rail 2211B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128.

  The pair of left and right first movable units 2220 are provided so as to be symmetrical with each other. The first movable unit 2220 includes a decorative member, a movable member that supports the decorative member, and a link mechanism that connects the movable member to the drive unit 2240A so that the movable member can move left and right. The movable member is connected to the guide rails 2211A and 2211B on both the upper and lower sides. It is supported so that it can move in the left-right direction along.

  The drive unit 2240A includes a motor, a reduction gear, and the like, and is connected to the link mechanism of the first movable unit 2220 and disposed on the base member 2210A. When the drive unit 2240A operates in a predetermined direction, the first movable unit 2220 is moved from the left and right end sides of the display area 4A to the center side in front of the display area 4A. One movable unit 2220 is moved from the center side in front of the display area 4A to the left and right ends of the display area 4A.

  The pair of left and right second movable units 2230 are provided so as to be symmetrical with each other. The second movable unit 2230 has a decorative member, a movable member that supports the decorative member, and a link mechanism that connects the movable member to the drive unit 2240B so that the movable member can swing. It is supported so that it can move.

  The drive unit 2240B includes a motor and a reduction gear, and is connected to the link mechanism of the second movable unit 2230 and disposed on the base member 2210B. When the drive unit 2240B operates in a predetermined direction, the second movable unit 2230 is moved downward from the upper left and right ends of the display area 4A to the center side in front of the display area 4A. Then, the second movable unit 2230 is moved upward from the center side in front of the display area 4A to the upper left and right ends of the display area 4A.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the guide rail 2211 </ b> B of the present embodiment is formed in a hollow box shape having an open surface 2212 as a lower surface, and the upper end portion 2221 of the first movable unit 2220 through the open surface 2212. Is slidably supported in the left-right direction. The upper end portion 2221 is formed with a convex portion 2222 that abuts against the smooth inner surface 2213 of the guide rail 2211B. The upper end portion 2221 is movable in the left-right direction until the convex portion 2222 is in contact with the inner side surface 2213 and abuts against the left and right side wall portions 2214 of the guide rail 2211B. Note that the upper end portion 2221 can be moved in directions other than the left-right direction, for example, movable in the front-rear direction. In addition to the upper end 2221, the movable member may be movable along the guide rail 2211 </ b> B at the lower end, the ends located on the left and right sides, or the ends located on the front and rear sides.

  A plurality of ribs 2215 are formed on the upper inner wall surface of the guide rail 2211 </ b> B so as to protrude toward the open surface 2212 side by side between the left and right side wall portions 2214. These ribs 2215 are formed to a height that does not hinder the upper end portion 2221 of the first movable unit 2220 from moving in the left-right direction. An interval P <b> 1 between adjacent ribs 2215 is narrower than a width W of the upper end portion 2221. Further, the interval P2 between the side wall portion 2214 of the guide rail 2211B and the rib 2215 at the nearest position is also narrower than the width W of the upper end portion 2221. Thereby, for example, even when a strong vibration or impact is applied to the movable member of the first movable unit 2220 during transport of the gaming machine, the upper end portion 2221 of the movable member is placed on the upper back surface of the guide rail 2211B. Since it does not hit directly, there is no possibility that the box-shaped guide rail 2211B will be damaged. Further, the rib 2215 also functions as a reinforcing structure for the entire guide rail 2211B, so that the guide rail 2211B can be made robust.

  According to such a shutter device 2200, when the first movable unit 2220 moves from the left and right sides to the center, the second movable unit 2230 is simultaneously lowered toward the center, and the first movable unit 2220 and the first movable unit 2220 Two movable units 2230 appear in front of the display area 4A. As a result, a form in which the first movable unit 2220 and the second movable unit 2230 are combined so as to hide the decorative symbols and the like displayed in the display area 4A can be formed, and a dynamic rendering effect as the shutter device 2200 can be formed. Can be demonstrated.

[Level display section]
Next, the level display unit 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The level display unit 2100 includes a rotating member 2110, a substrate cover 2120, an LED substrate 2130, a reflector 2140, a light transmissive sheet 2150, a front lens 2160, a front frame decoration member 2170, a rotating unit 2180, and a driving unit 2190. The

  As shown in FIG. 130, the rotation member 2110 is formed in a circular radial shape as a whole, and can be rotated by being driven by the rotation unit 2180. The rotating member 2110 includes a decorative portion 2111, a lens portion 2112, a diffusing lens 2113, and a base portion 2114. The decorative portion 2111 forms the front surface of the rotating member 2110, and includes a plurality of protruding portions 2111a formed radially at equal intervals, and a non-light emitting portion 2111b formed between the protruding portions 2111a and the protruding portions 2111a. . Each protrusion 2111a and non-light-emitting portion 2111b are formed as portions that do not transmit light outward. As shown in FIG. 134, the plurality of protrusions 2111a are radially arranged with an arrangement interval R of approximately 60 degrees. The lens portion 2112 is formed of a light-transmitting member in a radiating ring shape, and is disposed on the back side of the decorative portion 2111. The lens portion 2112 includes a plurality of convex portions 2112a formed radially corresponding to the non-light emitting portion 2111b of the decorative portion 2111, and a portion between the convex portions 2112a and 2112a corresponding to the protruding portion 2111a of the decorative portion 2111. And a plurality of intermediate portions 2112b formed on the substrate. Of the plurality of intermediate portions 2112b, the flat portion 2112c is formed in the intermediate portion 2112b positioned at the uppermost position in the initial position of the rotation operation, and the concave portion 2112d is formed in the remaining intermediate portion 2112b. The diffusing lens 2113 is a light diffusing member, is formed in a radiation ring shape that is the same shape as the lens portion 2112, and is disposed on the back side of the lens portion 2112. The diffusing lens 2113 includes a plurality of convex portions 2113 a corresponding to the convex portions 2112 a of the lens portion 2112 and a plurality of intermediate portions 2113 b corresponding to the intermediate portion 2112 b of the lens portion 2112. As shown in FIG. 131, a flat portion 2113c is formed at a position corresponding to the flat portion 2112c in the intermediate portion 2113b located at the top of the plurality of intermediate portions 2113b in the initial position of the rotation operation. A concave portion 2113d is formed in the intermediate portion 2113b at a position corresponding to the concave portion 2112d. Accordingly, the diffusing lens 2113 can be disposed in an appropriate posture on the back side of the lens portion 2112. The base part 2114 has an opening 2114a for fixing a substrate cover 2120, which will be described later, in the center part, and is integrated with the decoration part 2111 in a state in which the lens part 2112 and the diffusion lens 2113 are accommodated between the base part 2114. The As shown in FIG. 132, an inner peripheral gear 2114 b is formed on the back surface of the base portion 2114 so as to mesh with a gear 2122 for rotating the rotating member 2110. When the gear 2122 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the rotation unit 2180, the base portion 2114 is rotated, whereby the rotating member 2110 is rotated in a predetermined direction. As shown in FIG. 132, the rotation member 2110 is positioned behind the front lens 2160 and the front frame decoration member 2170 and rotates.

  According to such a rotating member 2110, for example, when rotating, only the light of the LED 2130b closest to the LED substrate 2130 and the LED 2130b positioned in a predetermined direction with respect to the convex portion 2112a of the lens portion 2112 is transmitted outward. The entire rotating lens unit 2112 is caused to emit light. 133 and 134 is the initial position (predetermined position) of the rotating operation, and from this state, the rotating member 2110 rotates in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. FIG. 135 shows a state in which the rotating member 2110 has rotated, for example, approximately 90 degrees from the initial position of FIG.

  The substrate cover 2120 is located at the inner center of the rotating member 2110 and is fixed via the opening 2114a of the base portion 2114 so as to maintain a stationary state with respect to the rotatable rotating member 2110. The substrate cover 2120 is formed with a plurality of slits 2121 for releasing heat from the LED substrate 2130 backward.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the LED substrate 2130 has a plurality of LEDs 2130a for 7-segment display on the front surface, and as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, in the rotating member 2110 along the peripheral edge of the back surface. A plurality of LEDs 2130b for causing the lens portion 2112 to emit light are provided. In addition, the LED substrate 2130 includes a partition member 2131 for dividing the 7-segment display LED 2130a into left and right. The partition member 2131 is provided such that the LEDs 2130a on the left and right sides can individually display numbers without affecting each other. When the 7-segment display LED 2130a lights up in a predetermined pattern, numbers and the like appear to be emitted from the outside of the front lens 2160.

  The LEDs 2130b (LEDs 2130ba to 2130bl) for causing the lens portion 2112 to emit light are arranged so that the arrangement interval r is smaller than the arrangement interval R of the convex portions 2112a of the lens portion 2112 (for example, approximately 1/2) at intervals of approximately 30 degrees. Arranged along the circumference. As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the convex portion 2112a as the light emitting portion and the decorative portion 2111 as the non-light emitting portion as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135 also depend on the arrangement relationship between the convex portion 2112a of the lens portion 2112 and the LED 2130b. Even if the protruding portion 2111a rotates (moves) by an arrangement interval R + R / 2 (movement distance L + L / 2) such as approximately 90 degrees, for example, the convex portion 2112a of the lens portion 2112 emitted by the LEDs 2130ba to 2130bc at the initial position, for example. Is emitted by the LEDs 2130bd to 2130bf corresponding to the rotation position (movement position), and the light quantity at the initial position and the light quantity at the rotation position (movement position) do not change significantly, so that the entire rotating rotating member 2110 rotates. Is emitted uniformly.

  For example, even if a plurality of light emitting units are moved linearly, the entire moving light emitting unit emits light by arranging LEDs behind the light emitting units at intervals smaller than the intervals between the light emitting units. Can be made. For example, when a plurality of light emitting units are linearly arranged at equal intervals and moved straight in a predetermined moving direction, the arrangement interval is narrower (for example, approximately ½ interval) than the arrangement interval of the plurality of light emitting units. Then, a plurality of LEDs may be arranged behind the light emitting unit so as to follow the moving direction. In this case, the plurality of light emitting units are located behind the front lens 2160 and the front frame decoration member 2170 and linearly move in a predetermined direction.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the reflector 2140 is disposed between the surface of the LED substrate 2130 and the light transmissive sheet 2150. The reflector 2140 has a light guide part 2141 for guiding light from the LED 2130a forward for each segment.

  The light transmissive sheet 2150 is disposed between the reflector 2140 and the front lens 2160. The light transmissive sheet 2150 uniformly diffuses the light guided through the light guide part 2141 of the reflector 2140 to the front lens 2160 for each segment.

  The front lens 2160 is fixed to the reflector 2140 via the front frame decoration member 2170. The front lens 2160 displays numbers and the like in a 7-segment system by transmitting light guided from the LED 2130a through the reflector 2140 and the like forward.

  The front frame decoration member 2170 is fixed so as to surround the periphery of the front lens 2160. The front frame decoration member 2170 enhances the rotating member 2110 that rotates together with the front lens 2160 and the like in a stationary state. As shown in FIG. 132, the front lens 2160 and the front frame decoration member 2170 are located in front of the rotation member 2110.

  The rotation unit 2180 includes a motor and a reduction gear, and is disposed behind the base portion 2114 of the rotation member 2110 so that the rotation member 2110 can rotate in a predetermined direction. When the motor of the rotation unit 2180 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the base portion 2114 via the gear 2122 and the inner peripheral gear 2114b, and thereby the rotation member 2110 is rotated. At this time, the LED substrate 2130, the front lens 2160, and the like are in a stationary state inside the rotating member 2110. As a result, numbers and the like can be displayed on the front lens 2160 while the rotating member 2110 rotates.

  The drive unit 2190 includes a motor, a reduction gear, and the like, and is disposed on the base member 2210A via a main part of the level display unit 2100 in which the rotation member 2110, the front lens 2160, and the like are integrated, and a link mechanism. When the drive unit 2190 operates in a predetermined direction, the main part of the level display unit 2100 is raised from the lower side of the display area 4A to the center side of the display area 4A. The main part of 2100 is moved from the center side of the display area 4A to the lower side of the display area 4A.

  According to such a level display unit 2100, it is possible to sufficiently improve the visual effect by light emission, movement / rotation operation when displaying the character level.

  Based on the above embodiment, the outline | summary of this invention is enumerated as an additional remark below.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a rotating accessory as a production device, and changes the amount of transmitted light by rotating the rotating accessory (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-115287). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the rotating accessory rotates, it is not possible to emit light with uniform brightness, and there is a possibility that the visual effect is reduced due to so-called uneven light emission.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and prevents a moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing a visual effect. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light (for example, LED 2130b of LED substrate 2130);
A plurality of translucent portions (for example, convex portions 2112a of the lens portion 2112 of the rotating member 2110) capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means;
Moving means (for example, a rotating unit 2180) for moving the plurality of light transmitting parts,
The plurality of light emitting means are arranged along a moving direction of the plurality of light transmitting parts (for example, a rotating direction of the rotating member 2110),
The plurality of translucent parts are:
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is formed so as to be transmissive,
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means can be transmitted at a predetermined position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 134),
The plurality of light emitting means irradiate even when the plurality of light transmitting portions move to a specific position other than the predetermined position (for example, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the initial position shown in FIG. 134). It arrange | positions in the position which can permeate | transmit light with respect to the said translucent part.

According to such a configuration, light from the same number of light emitting means as the predetermined position is irradiated even if the plurality of light transmitting parts move, and the plurality of light transmitting parts are moved to the predetermined position during the movement. The amount of light is not significantly reduced than when it was.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when the moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a moving accessory irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Appendix 1-1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a rotating accessory as a production device, and changes the amount of transmitted light by rotating the rotating accessory (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-115287). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the rotating accessory rotates, it is not possible to emit light with uniform brightness, and there is a possibility that the visual effect is reduced due to so-called uneven light emission.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and prevents a moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing a visual effect. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light (for example, LED 2130b of LED substrate 2130);
A plurality of translucent portions (for example, convex portions 2112a of the lens portion 2112 of the rotating member 2110) capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means;
A decorative portion (for example, a front frame decorative member 2170) disposed on the front side of the plurality of translucent portions;
Moving means (for example, a rotating unit 2180) for moving the plurality of light transmitting parts,
The plurality of translucent portions are arranged at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 60 degrees) along the moving direction (for example, the rotating direction of the rotating member 2110),
The plurality of translucent parts are:
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is formed so as to be transmissive,
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means can be transmitted at a predetermined position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 134),
The plurality of light emitting means includes
Even when the plurality of translucent parts move on the back side of the decoration part and move to a specific position other than the predetermined position (for example, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees shown in FIG. 135 from the initial position shown in FIG. 134). , Is arranged at a position where the irradiated light can be transmitted with respect to the translucent part,
It is characterized by being arranged at intervals (for example, intervals of 30 degrees) narrower than the predetermined interval along the moving direction of the plurality of light transmitting portions.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of translucent portions are movable on the back side of the decorative portion and are arranged at predetermined intervals along the moving direction, and the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at intervals more than the predetermined intervals. Has been. As a result, even when the plurality of translucent parts move, light from the same number of light emitting means as the predetermined position is irradiated, and the plurality of translucent parts are more than in the predetermined position during movement. The amount of light is not significantly reduced, and an effect in which a plurality of translucent portions and a decorative portion are integrated can be performed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving object irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when the moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a moving accessory irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a moving operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Appendix 1-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a rotating accessory as a production device, and changes the amount of transmitted light by rotating the rotating accessory (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-115287). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the rotating accessory rotates, it is not possible to emit light with uniform brightness, and there is a possibility that the visual effect is reduced due to so-called uneven light emission.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of causing a rotating member to emit light with uniform brightness and thus enhancing the visual effect. Objective.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light (for example, LED 2130b of LED substrate 2130);
A plurality of translucent portions (for example, convex portions 2112a of the lens portion 2112 of the rotating member 2110) capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means;
Rotating means (for example, a rotating unit 2180) for rotating the plurality of light transmitting parts,
The plurality of translucent portions are arranged at predetermined angles (for example, 60 degrees) along a rotation direction (for example, a rotation direction of the rotation member 2110),
The plurality of translucent parts are:
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is formed so as to be transmissive,
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means can be transmitted at a predetermined position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 134),
The plurality of light emitting means includes
Even when the plurality of translucent parts are rotated to a specific position other than the predetermined position (for example, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees shown in FIG. 135 from the initial position shown in FIG. 134), the irradiated light is transmitted to the translucent part. It is arranged at a position where it can be transmitted to
It arrange | positions every angle (for example, 30 degree | times) smaller than the said predetermined angle along the rotation direction of these translucent parts.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of light transmitting parts are arranged at predetermined angles along the rotation direction, and the light emitting means are arranged at an angle smaller than the predetermined angle. As a result, the translucent part rotates where the light from the light emitting means reaches, and thus rotates where the light reaches from the plurality of light emitting means even if the rotation operation is performed. For this reason, when the translucent part is rotated, a decrease in the amount of light received by the translucent part can be prevented.
As a result, even if the light-transmitting portion irradiated with light by the light emitting means is rotated only by a plurality of light emitting means, light is always irradiated by any of the light emitting means, so that the light irradiated by the light emitting means is not irradiated. It doesn't reach and can be prevented from becoming extremely dark.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving accessory irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when the rotating operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a moving accessory irradiated with light from becoming extremely dark when a rotating operation is performed, thereby enhancing the visual effect.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a structure for displaying logo characters in three dimensions has been proposed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-221124).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of characters constituting the logo are integrally formed on one member, the background cannot be seen from between the characters, In this case, there is a possibility that the visual effect by decoration cannot be enhanced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of visually recognizing a background from between characters and improving the visual effect by decoration. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A decorative member (for example, a front cover 1300) having a plurality of openings (for example, the opening 1311);
A plurality of projecting portions (for example, character portions 1211 of the character block 1200) that project from the opening of the decorative member and form a predetermined shape (for example, a character shape) when viewed from a predetermined direction,
The plurality of protrusions protrude from the opening of the decorative member, with a gap between each other,
The back side of the plurality of protrusions is
A cavity space (eg, cavity 1230);
And a partition portion (for example, a partition portion 1240) for partitioning the hollow space.

As a result, for example, the background drawn on the front surface of the decorative member can be visually recognized from between the protrusions forming the character shape. Moreover, it becomes possible to improve the intensity | strength of a protrusion part by a partition part, forming the predetermined shape protruded by the protrusion part.
Therefore, for example, the background can be visually recognized from between characters, and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to visually recognize a background from between characters, and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

[Appendix 2-1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a structure for displaying logo characters in three dimensions has been proposed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-221124).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, since a plurality of characters constituting the logo are integrally formed on one member, the characters cannot be clearly seen one by one. The visual effect may not be enhanced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which characters can be clearly seen one by one and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A decorative member (for example, a front cover 1300) having a plurality of openings (for example, the opening 1311);
A plurality of projecting portions (for example, character portions 1211 of the character block 1200) that project from the opening of the decorative member and form a predetermined shape (for example, a character shape) when viewed from a predetermined direction,
The decorative member includes a transmission part that transmits light (for example, the upper part 1310 of the front cover 1300) and a non-transmission part that does not transmit light (for example, the lower part 1320 of the front cover 1300),
The plurality of protrusions are
In the transmission part of the decorative member, with a gap between each other, it protrudes from the opening of the decorative member,
In the impermeable portion of the decorative member, each is fixed to the back side of the opening,
The back side of the plurality of protrusions is
A cavity space (eg, cavity 1230);
And a partition portion (for example, a partition portion 1240) for partitioning the hollow space.

According to such a configuration, for example, the plurality of projecting portions forming the character shape project from the opening of the decorative member with a gap therebetween in the transmitting portion that transmits the light of the decorative member, and the decorative member is not In the transmission part, it is fixed to the back side of the opening.
As a result, for example, the background drawn on the front surface of the decorative member can be visually recognized from between the protruding portion and the protruding portion forming the character shape, and light can be transmitted from the connecting position of the protruding portion and the decorative member. Leakage can be prevented as much as possible. For example, characters can be clearly displayed one by one.
Therefore, the characters can be clearly seen one by one, and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to clearly see characters one by one and to improve the visual effect by decoration.

[Appendix 2-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a structure for displaying logo characters in three dimensions has been proposed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-221124).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in conventional gaming machines, a plurality of characters constituting a logo are integrally formed on one member, so that the characters cannot be seen clearly one by one. There was a possibility that the visual effect could not be enhanced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which characters can be clearly seen one by one and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A decorative member (for example, a front cover 1300) having a plurality of openings (for example, the opening 1311);
A plurality of projecting portions (for example, a character portion 1211, an edge portion 1212, and a side wall portion 1220 of the character block 1200) that project from the opening of the decorative member and form a predetermined shape (for example, a character shape) when viewed from a predetermined direction. And comprising
The plurality of projecting portions include a side wall portion (for example, a side wall portion 1220) standing in the predetermined direction, and a tip portion (for example, a character portion 1211 and an edge portion) disposed at an end portion of the side wall portion in the predetermined direction. 1212)
The tip has a display part (for example, a character part 1211) formed in a predetermined shape, and an edge part (for example, an edge part 1212) surrounding the display part,
The display unit is difficult to transmit light,
The side wall portion and the rim portion can easily transmit light.

According to such a configuration, for example, the plurality of projecting portions forming the character shape are formed, for example, opaque so that the display portion is difficult to transmit light, and the side wall portion and the border portion are transparent, for example, easy to transmit light. Is formed.
Accordingly, it is possible to make the display portion appear opaque so as to make characters appear by transmitting light from the side wall portion and the edge portion.
Therefore, the characters can be clearly seen one by one, and the visual effect by decoration can be improved.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The back side of the plurality of protrusions is
A cavity space (eg, cavity 1230);
And a partition portion (for example, a partition portion 1240) for partitioning the hollow space.

  According to such a structure, it becomes possible to improve the intensity | strength of this protrusion part by a partition part, forming the protrusion part which protruded from the opening part of the decoration member.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to clearly see characters one by one and to improve the visual effect by decoration.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine configured such that the movable portion does not move from a predetermined position by forcibly moving the contacting member to contact the movable portion (movable accessory). (JP-A-2006-49205).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the restriction member is brought into contact with the movable part, the movable part may break the restriction member and move in a predetermined direction due to strong vibration or impact on the movable part. There was a risk of jumping out.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can hold a movable part in a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable part (for example, a movable member of the first movable unit 2220) movable in a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction);
Moving means (for example, a drive unit 2240A) for moving a first end of the movable section (for example, a lower end portion of a movable member of the first movable unit 2220);
An open surface (for example, the guide rail 2211B of the guide rail 2211B) that extends in the predetermined direction and has an open surface on which at least the second end of the movable portion (for example, the upper end portion 2221 of the movable member of the first movable unit 2220) can be inserted. A guide portion (e.g., guide rail 2211B) that is formed in a box shape having an open surface 2212) and movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion,
In the inside of the guide portion, a protruding portion (for example, a rib 2215) protruding toward the open surface is formed,
The second end portion of the movable portion includes a protruding piece (for example, a protruding portion 2222) protruding in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

According to such a configuration, the guide portion that is formed in a box shape having an open surface and movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion is internally formed with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the open surface side, A protruding piece that protrudes in a direction other than the moving direction is formed at the second end of the movable portion.
As a result, it is possible to improve the strength of the guide part, and it is possible to hold the second end part of the movable part inside the guide part without contacting with the strong vibration or impact on the movable part. Can be held in place with a simple structure.
Therefore, the movable part can be held at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to hold the movable part at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[Appendix 3-1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine configured such that the movable portion does not move from a predetermined position by forcibly moving the contacting member to contact the movable portion (movable accessory). (JP-A-2006-49205).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the restriction member is brought into contact with the movable part, the movable part may break the restriction member and move in a predetermined direction due to strong vibration or impact on the movable part. There was a risk of jumping out.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can hold a movable part in a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable part (for example, a movable member of the first movable unit 2220) movable in a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction);
Moving means (for example, a drive unit 2240A) for moving a first end of the movable section (for example, a lower end portion of a movable member of the first movable unit 2220);
An open surface (for example, the guide rail 2211B of the guide rail 2211B) that extends in the predetermined direction and has an open surface on which at least the second end of the movable portion (for example, the upper end portion 2221 of the movable member of the first movable unit 2220) can be inserted. A guide portion (e.g., guide rail 2211B) that is formed in a box shape having an open surface 2212) and movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion,
The second end of the movable part is formed with a width of a predetermined dimension (for example, width W),
The guide portion includes a plurality of projecting portions (for example, ribs 2215) projecting toward the open surface side at intervals (for example, a spacing P1) narrower than the predetermined dimension.
The second end portion of the movable portion includes a protruding piece (for example, a protruding portion 2222) protruding in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

According to such a configuration, the guide portion that is formed in a box shape having an open surface and that movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion has a projecting portion that protrudes toward the open surface side inside the movable portion. Plural pieces are formed at intervals narrower than the width of the second end portion, and a protruding piece that protrudes in a direction other than the moving direction is formed at the second end portion of the movable portion.
Thereby, it is possible to improve the strength of the guide part, and the plurality of protrusions of the guide part are formed at intervals narrower than the width of the second end part of the movable part, even by strong vibration and impact on the movable part. The second end of the movable part can be held inside the guide part without making contact, and the entire movable part can be held in a fixed position with a simple structure.
Therefore, the movable part can be held at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to hold the movable part at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[Appendix 3-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device, control to derive and display the variably displayed symbol is executed, and the derivation displayed symbol is a predetermined combination (specific display mode) ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine configured such that the movable portion does not move from a predetermined position by forcibly moving the contacting member to contact the movable portion (movable accessory). (JP-A-2006-49205).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the restriction member is brought into contact with the movable part, the movable part may break the restriction member and move in a predetermined direction due to strong vibration or impact on the movable part. There was a risk of jumping out.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can hold a movable part in a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A movable part (for example, a movable member of the first movable unit 2220) movable in a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction);
Moving means (for example, a drive unit 2240A) for moving a first end of the movable section (for example, a lower end portion of a movable member of the first movable unit 2220);
An open surface (for example, the guide rail 2211B of the guide rail 2211B) that extends in the predetermined direction and has an open surface on which at least the second end of the movable portion (for example, the upper end portion 2221 of the movable member of the first movable unit 2220) can be inserted. A guide portion (e.g., guide rail 2211B) that is formed in a box shape having an open surface 2212) and movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion,
The second end of the movable part is formed with a width of a predetermined dimension (for example, width W),
The guide part is
Inside, a plurality of protrusions (for example, ribs 2215) protruding toward the open surface side are formed,
A side wall (for example, a side wall part 2214) is formed at the end in the predetermined direction,
An interval between the plurality of protrusions adjacent to each other (for example, an interval P1) and an interval between the side wall and the protrusion adjacent to the side wall (for example, an interval P2) are smaller than the predetermined dimension,
The second end portion of the movable portion includes a protruding piece (for example, a protruding portion 2222) protruding in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

According to such a configuration, the guide portion that is formed in a box shape having an open surface and that movably supports the second end portion of the movable portion has a plurality of protruding portions that protrude toward the open surface inside each other. And the interval between the side wall of the guide portion and the protruding portion adjacent to the side wall is narrower than the width of the second end portion of the movable portion.
As a result, the strength of the guide part can be improved, and even when strong vibration or impact is applied to the movable part, the distance between the plurality of protrusions of the guide part or the distance between the side wall and the protrusion part of the guide part is reduced. Since it is narrower than the width of the second end, it can be held inside the guide without contacting the second end of the movable part, and the movable part as a whole can be held in place with a simple structure. It becomes.
Therefore, the movable part can be held at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to hold the movable part at a fixed position even by strong vibration or impact on the movable part.

1200 Character block 1211 Character part 1212 Border part 1220 Side wall part 1230 Cavity part 1240 Partition part 1300 Front cover 1310 Upper part 1311 Opening part 1320 Lower part 2110 Rotating member 2111 Light emitting part 2111b Non-light emitting part 2112 Lens part 2112a Convex part 2113 Diffuse lens 2114 Base part 2130 LED board 2130b (2130ba-2130bl) LED
2170 Front frame decoration member 2180 Rotating unit 2211B Guide rail 2212 Open surface 2214 Side wall 2215 Rib 2220 First movable unit 2221 Upper end 2222 Convex 2240A Drive unit P1 Interval P2 Interval W Width

Claims (1)

A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light;
A plurality of light transmitting parts capable of transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting means;
A decorative portion disposed on the front side of the plurality of light-transmitting portions;
Moving means for moving the plurality of translucent portions,
The plurality of translucent portions are arranged at predetermined intervals along the moving direction,
The plurality of translucent parts are:
The light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is formed so as to be transmissive,
Can transmit light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means at a predetermined position;
The plurality of light emitting means includes
Even when the plurality of translucent parts move on the back side of the decorative part and move to a specific position other than the predetermined position, the irradiated light is arranged at a position where the irradiated light can be transmitted to the translucent part. ,
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at an interval narrower than the predetermined interval along a moving direction of the plurality of light transmitting portions.

Images